Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

121
2013 CATALOG 2013 CATALOG TECHNOLOGY TRAINING 4G HSPA+ LTE EPC LTE-ADVANCED TD-LTE VoLTE CLOUD COMPUTING M2M UCC IP CONVERGENCE IPv6 MPLS IMS 1st EDITION

description

Award_cat

Transcript of Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

Page 1: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

2013 C

ATA

LOG

TEC

HN

OLO

GY TR

AININ

G •

1st E

DITIO

N

2013 CATALOGTECHNOLOGY TRAINING

4G HSPA+ LTE EPC LTE-ADVANCED TD-LTE VoLTE CLOUD COMPUTING M2M UCC IP CONVERGENCE IPv6 MPLS IMS

1st EDITION

Page 2: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

Why Award?

Integrity- We are a trusted vendor for more than 235 corporate clients, including the leading manufacturers and service providers in the wireless industry

Expertise- We have delivered more than 215,000 student days and more than 1.7 million training hours since 1997

- We have hands-on experience from design to deployment

- Our staff collectively holds more than 80 patents in communications technologies

Flexibility- We save you time with customized content and training solutions to meet project- specificneeds

- We can schedule training when and where you need it, with a global footprint of delivering training in more than 25 countries

- Our delivery methods give you cost-effective options, whether the preference is on-site, virtual, or self-paced eLearning

Excellent Return on Investment- We help teams ramp up on new technologies quicklyandefficiently

About this CatalogThis course catalog contains an overview of our company and services, course descriptions for both Instructor Led and eLearning delivery methods.

Let us help you and your team “become an expert” in advanced wireless and IP technologies. Simply go straight to a curriculum, or browse through the catalog to view the comprehensive training solutions and services offered by Award Solutions.

We provide cutting-edge training courses with the highest quality. The course descriptions in this catalog are subject to change and new course descriptions are added to curriculums throughout the year. Please visit Award’s website at www.awardsolutions.com or contact us at +1-972-664-0727 ext. 306 for the latest information.

Page 3: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

Table of Contents

Why Award? ...................................................... iCompany Overview ..................................................... 1Instructor Led Training ............................................... 2Self-paced eLearning ................................................. 3Course Index ...........................................................117

Wireless Landscape....................................103Welcome to Wireless Networks (e) .......................104Welcome to GSM/GPRS (e) ...................................1051xEV-DO Networks (Rev 0) (e) ...............................1061xEV-DO Networks (Rev A) (e) ...............................107Overview of 3G Wireless Networks (e) ..................108Overview of WiMAX (e) ...........................................109Exploring Wireless Landscape, IP Convergence, and 4G ..110Exploring Wireless Technologies and Networks ...111Fundamentals of RF Engineering ..........................112Exploring GSM/EGPRS/UMTS/HSPA/HSPA+ .......113GSM Performance Workshop ................................1141x and 1xEV-DO Fundamentals ............................115Wireless and 3G/4G Basics ..................................116

UMTS/HSPA+ ................................................79Welcome to UMTS (e) ..............................................80Overview of UMTS (e) ...............................................81UMTS/WCDMA Air Interface Fundamentals (e) .......82UMTS Signaling (e) ...................................................83UMTS Mobility (e) .....................................................84HSDPA (R5) (e) .........................................................85HSUPA (R6) (e) .........................................................86HSPA+ Overview (R7) (e) .........................................87Exploring UMTS (WCDMA) .......................................88Exploring HSPA+ (R7, R8 & R9) ..............................89Multi-Carrier HSPA+ (R8 & R9) ................................90Mastering UMTS Core Networks (R99 to R7) .........91Mastering UMTS Radio Protocols and Signaling ....92Mastering HSPA Protocols and Signaling ...............93HSPA+ Protocols and Signaling (R7, R8 & R9) ......94IMS in UMTS (R8) Networks ....................................953GPP Packet Core Networks (R99 to R8) ...............96UMTS/HSPA/HSPA+ Air Interface ........................... 97UMTS/HSPA (WCDMA) RF Design Mentoring .........98UMTS (WCDMA) RF Optimization Mentoring ..........99UMTS/HSPA+ RF Optimization Workshop ............101

4G LTE ............................................................19Welcome to LTE (e) ...................................................20LTE Overview (e) .......................................................21LTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Overview (e) ....22LTE Air Interface Signaling Overview (e) .................23VoLTE Overview (e) ...................................................24Overview of IPv6 for LTE Networks (e) ....................25The Road to LTE ........................................................26LTE Essentials...........................................................27LTE Technology Overview .........................................28Exploring IPv6 for LTE Networks ..............................29VoLTE and IMS in LTE-EPC Networks ......................30Mastering LTE Air Interface ..................................... 31LTE Protocols and Signaling ....................................32Mastering TD-LTE Air Interface ................................33LTE and GSM/UMTS Interworking ...........................34LTE-EPC Networks and Signaling ............................35LTE-Advanced Technical Overview ..........................36LTERFPlanningandDesignCertificationWorkshop .. 37LTERANSignalingandOperationsCertification ....38LTE-EPCCapacityPlanningCertificationWorkshop ...39LTERANCapacityPlanningCertificationWorkshop ..40

**

*

* New Course (e) eLearning Course

IP Convergence & IMS ................................. 47Welcome to IP Networking (e) .................................48IP Convergence Overview (e) ...................................49Overview of MPLS (e) ...............................................50Overview of IMS (e) .................................................. 51Voice and Video over IP (VoIP) Overview (e) ...........52IP Quality of Service (QoS) (e) .................................53Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) (e) .........................54Ethernet Backhaul Overview (e) ..............................55IP Basics (e) ..............................................................56IP Routing (e) ............................................................57QoS in IP Networks (e) .............................................58TCP and Transport Layer Protocols (e) ....................59Ethernet Basics (e) ...................................................60Ethernet VLANs (e) ...................................................61Ethernet Bridging (e) ................................................62Interconnecting IP Networks (e) ..............................63Welcome to IPv6 (e) .................................................64IP Convergence Essentials ......................................65Ethernet Backhaul Essentials .................................66Exploring IPv6 ...........................................................67Exploring MPLS ........................................................68Exploring IMS (R8) ...................................................69Exploring SIP, VoIP and IP Convergence with IMS ..70Exploring Ethernet Backhaul ...................................71Voice and Video over IP Protocols and Technologies ..72Exploring IP Routing and Ethernet Bridging ...........73Ethernet Backhaul Planning .................................... 74SIP and Diameter for IMS/VoLTE ............................75Exploring Cloud Computing Service Models........... 76Exploring Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS) ...........77Exploring the Service Oriented Architecture (SOA) 78

*

*

**

*

Emerging Trends ........................................... 41Overview of OFDM (e) ..............................................42Multiple Antenna Techniques (e) ............................43Wi-Fi Overview (e) .....................................................44Wi-Fi Technical Overview .........................................45*

Technology for Business ................................ 5Enterprise IP Network Connectivity ........................... 6Compare and Contrast Cellular Technologies .......... 7The World of Enterprise ............................................. 8Cloud Computing Essentials for Business ................ 9The M2M Ecosystem................................................10UnifiedCommunications(UC)andIMSfortheEnterprise ..11IP Convergence for Sales and Marketing ...............12LTE Services for Enterprise Customers ...................13Technology Trends for Business ..............................14The World of App Development ...............................15The Mobile Enterprise ..............................................16Topics of Interest ...................................................... 17

*

*

**

**

Page 4: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

1© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

Company Overview

Award Solutions, Inc. has more than 15 years of training excellence in advanced wireless and IP technologies. Our products and services provide ourclientswithinnovative,flexible,andcost-effective solutions that help rapidly boost workforce productivity and competence to more quickly meet market demands.

The level of technical depth in our training programsgivesstudentsuniquebenefitsthattheycan apply immediately. We offer a range of courses appropriate for audiences needing a high-level overview, as well as engineers looking for technical details.

Our Subject Matter Experts (SMEs) and consultants are best-in-class, having achieved substantial industry experience in areas such as product definitionanddevelopment,networkdeployment,and network and systems engineering. We strive to help our students and customers “become an expert”.

AwardSolutionsconstantlykeepsafingeronthepulse of the industry, always researching new technologies, and updating our curriculums to stay on the cutting edge.

Whether you are a training manager responsible for a large organization, or a team lead responsible for enhancing your team’s skills, Award Solutions can meet your technology training needs.

ContentOur focus has always been on developing content that’s valuable to the students and presented in a way that is easy to understand. We present the big picture and pull the details together to explain how they relate.

AnalogiesWe use various techniques to simplify complex technologies. Analogies in our courses are abundant and easy to comprehend, relating concepts to real-life scenarios.

FlexibilityWeofferflexibilityinourcoursecontentandscheduling, and multiple delivery options. Every course from Award Solutions is tailored during the coursedeliverytomeetthespecificneedsoftheaudience.

ExpertiseOur courses are designed, developed and delivered by our own industry experts who have a wealth of relevant experience and a passion for teaching. Not only do our Subject Matter Experts (SMEs) understand the technology, they know how to teach, emphasize the key points, repeat what’s important, and bring in analogies and examples as needed. They are focused on knowledge transfer and don’t teach just “by the book,” instead adapting to the students’ needs. They bring invaluable knowledge into the classroom because they can relate the theory to real-world experiences.

EngagingWe leverage the latest technology to create engaging, interactive courses regardless of the delivery format. Keeping participants engaged is paramount.

Our PromiseTo continually demonstrate our core values: Integrity, Expertise, Flexibility, Teamwork and Excellent Return on Investment.

Training Facts

•98%ofthosetakingAwardclasses would recommend them to others

•235+corporateclientsincludingleading operators and manufacturers worldwide

•Morethan49,000studenttrainingdays delivered on LTE since 2007

•Morethan215,000studentdaysand 1.7 million training hours delivered since 1997

•Averagecourseevaluationis4.5outof5

•OurSubjectMatterExpertshavean average of 21 years of experience in the wireless industry

Page 5: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

2 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

Instructor Led Training

Award Solutions offers programs designed for business roles as well as technical roles. Our Subject Matter Experts (SMEs) blend accurate, relevant content with insightful analogies and a touch of humor, providing students with a rich learning experience. We also tailor the content duringclasstothespecificbackgroundandexperience of the students.

Our technical courses span introductory to advanced brimming with technical details. The level of technical depth in our advanced technology training courses is unique to the marketplace. Award Solutions is known for teaching “beyond the facts.” We bring you the big picture view, and explain the hows and the whys, along with the factual details. Our goal is to provide students with a good understanding of the technology, answer questions, and equip participants to apply their newly acquired knowledge, ultimately increasing productivity.

Our Technology for Business curriculum caters to executives, business and sales roles. It is designed to help individuals understand the direction of the industry and impact of new technologies.

We offer highly customized training and consulting solutions. We can integrate topics from multiple courses to deliver only the information important to you and your team. We can also integrate our

trainingprogramswithyourspecifictoolsand/orproduct-specificinformation.

In an effort to help organizations determine the effectiveness of our training programs, we offer Skills Assessment. The results offer a tangible measurement of the knowledge growth and overall courseeffectiveness.Thefinalreportincludesthepre-course score and post-course score along with the%improvementforeachparticipant.

All students that participate in our Instructor Led courses receive illustrated course books. Course books include the presentation slides and comprehensive text explaining the key points. In addition, Award Solutions provides students with an eBook and classroom notes.

On-site TrainingOur Subject Matter Experts (SMEs) travel to your facility to engage the students in an

interactive learning experience.

Students can receive answers to their questions during class or in one-on-one sessions during breaks. Our Subject Matter Experts are also accessible via e-mail after the course completes.

Virtual TrainingAward Solutions embraces different learning styles and preferences. Our

Virtual Training programs are conducted by our Subject Matter Experts in real-time. Students login to the course from the comfort of their homeorofficeandengageinanexpert-Ledinteractive learning experience. For teams that are geographically dispersed, clients save on travel and living expenses and maximize productivity and learning.

Award Solutions’ virtual training environment adds a new dimension of learning. Our Subject Matter Experts encourage questions and promote discussions. The sessions are highly interactive and very effective.

Public Training EventsAward Solutions hosts a subset of our coursesinourofficeandinconjunction

with Industry events. This expert-led sessions are ideal for individuals and small groups. Visit our website at www.awardsolutions.com or lteuniversity.com for the latest schedule.

Page 6: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

3© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1. 972.664.0727

Self-paced eLearning

AwardSolutions’flexibilityindeliverymethodsletyou choose a format and style appropriate to your needs.

Our self-paced eLearning is designed to target a wide range of students. Our overview courses are ideal “foundation builders” for design engineers, as well as executives and managers interested in an end-to-end view of the network architecture. For those who desire a greater level of detail on specificportionsofthenetwork,weoffermoreadvanced courses.

eLearning CoursesDesigned to accommodate a wide variety of learning styles, our eLearning

courses take full advantage of the multimedia environment. Each course provides students with full audio, narrated text and colorful animations to enhance the learning experience. Review questions in a variety of formats test the students’ understanding for each topic. Many courses also offer an opportunity to “dig deeper” into topics. In addition, every eLearning course allows students to navigate through the courses according to their own interests and needs, rather than in a strictly “linear” fashion.

At the end of each course, 10 review questions enable students to assess their understanding. The summary report allows students to quickly review the content that needs further study.

BenefitsAward Solutions’ eLearning courses are rich in technical content. Courses are designed specificallyfortheself-pacedmultimedialearningenvironment.

Delivery MethodsAll eLearning courses are available via our website at www.awardsolutions.com.

For large organizations, we offer volume discounts and site licenses. Our courses are SCORM compliant and may be easily integrated with a Learning Management Systems (LMS). The LMS keeps track of the student’s progress, and the results of the course assessment.

DurationOur eLearning courses have varying durations, ranging from 1 to 4 hours. All courses are divided into topics that can be completed in 15 minutes or less. Students may take the training in shorter segments or in longer blocks to digest all the information covered at their own pace.

eLearning demos are available on our website at www.awardsolutions.com.

Welcome to IPv6 eLearning Course

Page 7: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

4 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

Page 8: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

5© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

In the telecommunications industry today, it takes less time to tell someone what is not changing, rather than what is. Wireless networks and devices are continually increasing in speed and capability, and Machine-to-Machine connections are growing exponentially. On the wireline side, cloud computingissignificantlyimpactingtheITparadigm,therecontinuesalarge-scaleconvergencetowarddataandIPnetworks,andenterprisesandorganizations are looking for ways to use the technology to work and collaborate more effectively.

TheTechnologyforBusinesscurriculumincludescoursescoveringIPConvergence,Machine-to-Machine(M2M),UnifiedCommunications,CloudComputing, and LTE. In addition we would be happy to work with you to understand your training objectives and customize a solution that meets your needs.

About the CurriculumThe Award Solutions Technology for Business curriculum is designed for executives and sales/marketing teams to understand the direction of the industry and impact of key technologies. It equips salespeople to sell technology-based solutions by helping them understand their customer’s problem domain, explain technology-based solution components, and explore creative solutions.

Instructor Led Courses*Enterprise IP Network Connectivity *NEW*Compare and Contrast Cellular Technologies *NEW*The World of Enterprise *NEWCloud Computing Essentials for BusinessThe M2M EcosystemUnifiedCommunications(UC)andIMSfortheEnterpriseIP Convergence for Sales and MarketingLTE Services for EnterpriseTechnology Trends for Business*The World of App Development *NEW*The Mobile Enterprise *NEW*Topics of Interest *NEW

Technology for Business

IP Convergence for Sales and Marketing

Page 9: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

6 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

Enterprise IP Network Connectivity Instructor Led (Virtual) | Duration: 1 Hour

For those working with enterprise IT departments, it helps to be able to speak the language of IP connectivity. IP is to data transfer as a dial tone is to a wireline telephone. Data-related conversations with those in enterprise IT departments can sound like they are in a foreign language. This session introduces a number of concepts that might likely arise in such conversations, with a focus on understanding different options for how enterprises might achieve IP communication between different sites. It discusses how the options differ and provides examples of when different options make sense. The session gives special focus to the popular Layer 3 IP-VPN scenario. Intended Audience This course is intended for anyone seeking a basic overview of Enterprise IP network connectivity. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Sketch a layered view of a large enterprise network • Sketch how IP networks are interconnected within a large company • State the role of MPLS in interconnecting networks • List enterprise options for connectivity • Compare and contrast L1, l2 and L3 VPN connectivity solutions • Describe the role of MPLS • Show end-to-end route propagation and traffic flow with layer 3

VPNs

Course Outline 1. Enterprise Networks: A Big Picture

1.1. Layered view 1.2. Site connectivity

2. Example of a Simple Site 2.1. Architecture, components and

terminology 2.1.1. Layers (IP, Ethernet, physical,

Wi-Fi) 2.1.2. Routers and switches 2.1.3. VLAN, subnet, domains

3. Interconnection with VPN solutions 3.1. Public vs. private VPNs

3.1.1. VPN through Internet connection

3.1.2. VPN through private connection

3.2. Types of private VPN services (Layers 1-3 ) Explore the benefits/limitations, applicability, and an example of the following: 3.2.1. Layer 1 VPN 3.2.2. Layer 2 VPN

3.2.2.1. Point-to-point 3.2.2.2. Any-to-any (VPLS)

3.2.3. Layer 3 or IP VPN 3.3. Role of MPLS

4. End-to-End IP Interconnectivity

Scenario 4.1. Routing: How routers learn about

their world 4.2. Forwarding: How packets travel

from source to destination 5. Summary

Page 10: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

7© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

Compare and Contrast Cellular Technologies Instructor Led (Virtual) | Duration: 2 Hours

The world of cellular technologies can be daunting: it is a world that blends cutting-edge newer technologies with legacy technologies that have been deployed for years. These technologies share some characteristics and have distinct differences, and every technology comes with a new set of acronyms to confuse those trying to make sense of it all! In addition, some technologies support optional features that may or may not be deployed; features which can significantly impact data speeds and performance. This variety of characteristics and options, combined with the confusing marketing messages proclaimed to the public, underscores the importance for technical sales teams to be clear on (and be able to clarify for the customer) the true similarities and differences between the technologies. This session explores UMTS/HSPA+ and LTE and provides a conceptual comparison of the key benefits and limitations of each. Intended Audience This course is intended for those in technical sales roles. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• List the evolution of the technologies in the GSM family (GSM/GPRS, UMTS, HSPA, HSPA+, LTE) and the CDMA family (CDMA2000 1x, 1xEV-DO)

• Describe the value added by each new step in the technology evolution

• Sketch how different technologies within the same family operate simultaneously

• Compare voice capacities and quality across technologies • Compare theoretical and practical data speeds across

technologies • Describe how simultaneous voice and data connections are

achieved through different technologies • Describe interoperability between one technology and another • Summarize the key benefits and limitations of UMTS/HSPA+ and

LTE • Discuss the importance of network engineering to cellular

performance • Discuss the role of frequency spectrum in cellular performance.

Course Outline 1. Cellular Generations 2. A Tale of Two Families 3. Technology Paths

3.1. GSM, UMTS, HSPA/HSPA+, LTE 3.2. CDMA2000 1x, 1xEV-DO (Rev. A)

4. North American Operators 4.1. Verizon, AT&T, T-Mobile, Sprint/Clear

5. 4G Clarified 6. Wireless Data Performance

6.1. Frequency channels and bandwidth 6.2. Frequency spectrum 6.3. Shared bandwidth 6.4. Quality of Service (QoS) 6.5. Advanced antenna techniques 6.6. Network engineering

7. Technology Comparison For

UMTS/HSPA+ and LTE (Compare the Following) 7.1. Frequency channels (includes TD-

LTE) 7.2. Data rates: Theoretical vs.

practical 7.3. Architecture 7.4. Interoperability and global

roaming 7.5. QoS 7.6. Simultaneous voice and data

(includes VoLTE) 8. LTE-Advanced 9. Summary

Page 11: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

8 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

The World of the Enterprise Instructor Led (Virtual) | Duration: 4 Hours

The sales role within operators is changing from a single-point-of-contact, ‘widget’-based approach to a much more consultative approach, working with different roles within a company to propose a relevant, customer-specific solution. This can be a difficult transition for those accustomed to the traditional approach. It mean making new contacts within different organizations (inside and outside of telecom/IT), and perhaps at different levels. The consultative sell also means understanding more about the customer’s business, to be able to propose relevant solutions. The World of the Enterprise is designed to help those in such roles become familiar with the world of larger businesses, providing a big picture of the enterprise organization and processes that will help them make this transition. Intended Audience This course is intended for anyone seeking a basic overview of how large businesses are organized and approach communications-related projects. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• List and describe several technology trends impacting businesses • List key C-level roles that might be present within a company and

describe their function • Describe how an IT department is organized to provide information

services to the enterprise • Explain a typical process by which IT implements new solutions • Define common business acronyms such as ERP and BI • Illustrate the felt needs of a typical IT organization

Course Outline 1. Enterprise Organization

1.1. Trends changing business 1.2. Typical organization 1.3. Lines of Business (LOBs)

2. C-Level Roles and Responsibilities 2.1. CEO 2.2. COO 2.3. CFO 2.4. CTO 2.5. CIO 2.6. CMO

3. The IT Organization 3.1. 3D view of IT 3.2. IT overview 3.3. IT Org structure 3.4. Application development 3.5. Infrastructure 3.6. Operations 3.7. Shared services 3.8. Exercise

4. IT Operations

4.1. IT Project Lifecycle 4.2. IT Operational Model

4.2.1. Plan 4.2.1.1. Enterprise

Resource Planning (ERP)

4.2.1.2. Business Process Management (BPM)

4.2.1.3. Business Intelligence (BI)

4.2.1.4. Mobile Device Management

4.2.2. Build 4.2.3. Run

4.3. IT Processes 4.4. Managing the Business

4.4.1. Key Performance Indicators 4.4.2. Considerations

5. Summary

Page 12: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

9© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

Cloud Computing Essentials for Business Instructor Led | Duration: 1/2 Day

Cloud computing is gathering momentum as a solution that can save consumers and enterprises time and money. There are a variety of cloud-based approaches, including Infrastructure-as-a-Service (IaaS), Software-as-a-Service (SaaS), and Platform-as-a-Service (PaaS), and these alternatives, combined with an industry eager to advertise their cloud-based solutions, can cause cloudiness in the minds of enterprises, service providers and consumers trying to determine how the cloud can help them. This training solution introduces cloud computing in general, and then focuses on the three predominant implementations of cloud computing. It combines both a view of the technology and the business considerations to create a comprehensive understanding of cloud computing. Where appropriate, real examples of Cloud solutions are discussed. Intended Audience This course is intended for those who desire to understand Cloud Computing in more depth, from both a business and technical perspective. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to: • Explain the value proposition behind cloud computing • Discuss the merits and downsides of cloud computing for the

consumer and the enterprise • Describe the business and technical considerations for the three

predominant flavors of cloud computing: IaaS, SaaS, and PaaS • Differentiate between public, private, virtual private and hybrid cloud

models • List and explain different flavors of IaaS • Explain the importance of SLAs in cloud computing solutions • Discuss the future of cloud computing, both in the consumer and

enterprise arenas

Course Outline 1. Cloud Computing

1.1. Cloud Computing defined 1.2. Cloud Computing components 1.3. Industry trends 1.4. SaaS, IaaS, and PaaS 1.5. Cloud categories

1.5.1. Public 1.5.2. Private 1.5.3. Hybrid

1.6. Motivations 1.7. Pros and cons

2. Infrastructure as a Service 2.1. Types of IaaS 2.2. Virtualization 2.3. Deployment 2.4. Administration 2.5. Resource allocation options

2.5.1. Administrative 2.5.2. Programmatic

2.6. Security 2.7. Configuration options 2.8. Pricing options 2.9. Industry examples

3. Platform as a Service

3.1. Development benefits of PaaS 3.2. Platform options 3.3. Industry examples

4. Software as a Service 4.1. Requirements for SaaS

applications 4.2. SaaS challenges 4.3. Service Level Agreements (SLAs) 4.4. Synchronization 4.5. Security 4.6. Office apps: Microsoft and Google

5. The Cloud and Mobility 5.1. Benefits and challenges 5.2. Cloud and M2M 5.3. Example

6. Cloud Computing: The Future 6.1. Standards 6.2. Consumer space 6.3. Enterprise space

Page 13: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

10 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.2

The M2M Ecosystem Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day | Course Number: TBS_102

The area of mobile Machine-to-Machine (M2M) communications is exploding. Wireless service providers regularly report their ‘connections’ in addition to their subscribers. Devices such as eBook readers continue to demonstrate the power of wireless connectivity to the consumer psyche, and vertical markets are seeing the potential of M2M like never before. In addition, 4G networks promise support for new types of M2M devices and applications. This course helps participants understand the different elements of the ecosystem required to make M2M solutions successful, from devices to service providers to applications and systems integrators. Several concrete examples are developed throughout the course. Upon request, the session can include an exercise that guides participants in considering how one of their customers might benefit from M2M solutions. Intended Audience This course is intended for those in sales-related roles with a need to understand the M2M ecosystem in greater detail. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Describe M2M in a sentence • Sketch the entities involved in an M2M solution • Describe the current state of the M2M industry • List several examples of embedded devices and the problems they

solve • List key players in the device, service provider, and M2M

management spaces • Give examples of M2M across several vertical markets • Describe how a business could benefit from M2M solutions

Course Outline 1. M2M Overview

1.1. M2M defined 1.2. M2M ecosystem 1.3. Mobile vs. wired M2M 1.4. Implications and challenges 1.5. Applications 1.6. Selling M2M

2. M2M Devices 2.1. Device considerations 2.2. Traffic requirements 2.3. Device configurations 2.4. Device management 2.5. Security 2.6. Wireless technologies and M2M 2.7. Key players 2.8. Device examples

3. M2M Connectivity and Management 3.1. M2M connectivity 3.2. M2M business models 3.3. Traditional providers

3.3.1. AT&T 3.3.2. Verizon 3.3.3. Sprint

3.4. Non-traditional service providers 3.5. M2M management platforms 3.6. Security in M2M

4. Exercise for Sales (Optional): M2M

at your Customer 4.1. Customer need(s) 4.2. Possible solutions 4.3. Questions to answer 4.4. Next steps

Page 14: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

11© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

Unified Communications (UC) and IMS for the Enterprise Instructor Led | Duration: 1/2 Day | Course Number: TBS_103

As communications networks converge upon the Internet Protocol (IP), devices continue to expand their capabilities, wireless networks are becoming faster and more sophisticated, and newer services such as instant messaging and collaboration are augmenting (and replacing) traditional services such as voice and email communications. The world of Unified Communications and Collaboration (UCC or UC&C) seeks to bind some of these elements together to create a communications ecosystem that is more convenient, simpler to operate, and easier to manage. Businesses are formulating and executing their UCC strategies and seeing results. At the same time, the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) platform is gaining momentum as a standardized framework for providing IP-based services. This learning solution explores the world of UCC, covering a variety of UCC concepts and approaches, and introduces IMS and how IMS might work together with wireless and wireline technologies to provide UCC solutions for businesses. Intended Audience This course is intended for account managers involved with Enterprise Sales. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to: • Clearly define Unified Communications and Collaborations (UCC) • List several services that typically fall under the UCC umbrella and

describe their operation at a high level • Sketch a general UCC architecture, and describe the function of the

UCC Engine, Mobility Servers, and Presence • List several providers of UCC solutions and name and briefly

describe their UCC solutions • Describe the vision of Mobile UCC and the components required to

make it a reality • Explain how existing UCC solutions can be extended through mobility • Clearly define the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) • Sketch a high-level IMS architecture and describe the roles of the

Application Servers, Session Controllers, and service enablers • Clearly define Quality of Service (QoS), why it is important, and how it

is supported in IMS • Describe how IMS is well-suited for implementing some UCC

solutions • Compare an IMS-based UCC approach to a non-IMS based approach

Course Outline 1. UCC Defined

1.1. Perspectives on UCC 1.2. UCC defined 1.3. UCC and the Enterprise 1.4. UCC trends 1.5. Why now?

2. UCC Services 2.1. Voice 2.2. Messaging/unified messaging 2.3. Conferencing 2.4. Instant messaging/chat 2.5. Presence/location 2.6. Collaboration 2.7. UC-enabled business processes 2.8. Example: Contact center

3. UCC Components 3.1. UCC options 3.2. UCC components

3.2.1. IP-PBX/UCC manager 3.2.2. Application servers 3.2.3. IP phones 3.2.4. UCC clients

3.3. Mobile UC

4. UCC and IMS

4.1. IMS defined 4.2. Quality of Service (QoS) 4.3. VoLTE and RCS 4.4. IMS and UCC

5. Moving Forward

Page 15: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

12 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.1

IP Convergence for Sales and Marketing Instructor Led | Duration: 3 Days | Course Number: TBS_104

IP Convergence is bringing together technologies and companies, and enterprise account managers are finding the need to be conversant in this space. Technologies such as Ethernet, VoIP, Unified Communications, and IMS are building blocks for providing “Quad Play” and advanced B2B communication services. This course explains fundamental concepts behind these building block technologies to enhance the knowledge and confidence of enterprise salespeople in the IP Convergence domain. It provides the background necessary to understand the value proposition behind the collaborative deployment of these technologies, allowing the participants to discuss solutions with greater confidence, relevance and accuracy. The course includes several exercises and can incorporate an optional in-class assessment to assist with retention. Intended Audience This course has been designed for those involved with B2B sales and marketing. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Highlight the goals and industry direction towards 4G and IP convergence for Quad Play and multimedia services

• Explain interdependence and collaboration between VoIP, MPLS/VPLS, Metro/Carrier Ethernet, 3G/4G and IMS

• Sketch the architecture of an IP-Converged network and list its benefits • Sketch an MPLS architecture and list its services • Describe key MPLS concepts: Pseudowire, L2 and L3 VPN services and

VPLS • List the motivation, benefits and challenges associated with VoIP • Sketch the VoIP architecture • Explain hosted VoIP and legacy Centrex services operations • List and elaborate on key characteristics of SIP • List the motivation, benefits and challenges associated with IMS • Describe IMS building blocks (presence, location, authentication etc.) • Explain IMS service portability and mobility independent of access • Discuss alternatives to IMS and the competitive landscape • Sketch a basic enterprise network architecture • Show how authentication and security are provided in an IP converged

network • Sketch the LTE network architecture at a high level • List key capabilities and possible applications of LTE • Understand and use typical data-related acronyms correctly in

communication Suggested Prerequisites

• Welcome to IP Networking (eLearning)

Course Outline 1. Setting the Stage

1.1. IP Convergence: What is it? 1.2. IP Convergence technologies

1.2.1. IP/MPLS 1.2.2. Carrier Ethernet 1.2.3. 3G/4G wireless 1.2.4. DSL/Cable/Fiber 1.2.5. VoIP/IMS

2. IP Networking Fundamentals 2.1. Internet architecture 2.2. IP networking protocol layers 2.3. IP routing and forwarding

3. IP/MPLS 3.1. Capabilities and benefits 3.2. Network architecture and key

concepts 3.3. Conceptual operations in

IP/MPLS 3.4. MPLS applications

3.4.1. L2 and L3 VPNs 3.4.2. VPWS and Pseudowire

3.5. IPv6 benefits and challenges 4. Metro/Carrier Ethernet

4.1. Motivation and benefits 4.2. Network architecture and key

concepts 4.3. Applications and network

operations 5. Voice and Video Over IP

5.1. Network architecture and key concepts

5.2. VoIP call: Flexibility and security

5.3. More flexibility through SIP and SDP 5.4. Interworking with legacy networks 5.5. Video over IP 5.6. Software services

6. IMS 6.1. IMS defined 6.2. Capabilities and benefits 6.3. Network architecture and key

concepts 6.4. IMS session setup 6.5. Inter-network mobility in IMS 6.6. Interworking with PSTN and Web

7. Introduction to IP Network Security 7.1. “Big Picture” of IP security landscape 7.2. Challenges in IP security 7.3. IP network security architecture and

techniques 7.3.1. Layered security architecture 7.3.2. Authentication and anonymity 7.3.3. Traffic encryption and privacy

8. 4G LTE 8.1. Network architecture and key

concepts 8.2. Capabilities and key applications 8.3. Mobility

9. Assessment Test

Page 16: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

13© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

LTE Services for Enterprise Customers Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day

LTE promises much faster data speeds and access to services that were not practical in 3G. As enterprise customers explore the capabilities and implications of this technology, those involved with enterprise sales need to be prepared to confidently and accurately answer their questions. This session provides the background necessary to answer more involved questions about the LTE technology and how it applies to enterprise customers, including questions about devices and SIM cards, LTE sessions, connecting to enterprise networks, Quality of Service, Voice Over IP, and interoperability with other technologies, including EV-DO and UMTS/HSPA+. Intended Audience This course is intended for those in sales-related roles with a need to dialog with customers about LTE. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Explain the concept of a PDN in LTE and how it relates to enterprise data access

• Describe Quality of Service (QoS) in general, and how it is supported in IMS and LTE

• Sketch a high-level view of a packet data session in LTE • Explain the difference between Idle and Connected states, and the

impact to applications • Explain the value provided by IMS • Explain at a high level the process of transitioning between LTE and

EV-DO or UMTS/HSPA+ • Describe how voice services can be provided over LTE and IMS

through VoLTE as well as traditional circuit-switched voice • List the benefits of providing VoIP services through IMS vs. Over-

The-Top

Course Outline 1. LTE Service Architecture

1.1. 4G landscape 1.2. LTE network architecture 1.3. Packet Data Networks (PDNs) 1.4. Access Point Names (APNs) 1.5. LTE devices

1.5.1. Device categories 1.5.2. SIM cards

1.6. Quality of Service (QoS) 2. LTE Sessions

2.1. Attach 2.2. LTE security 2.3. LTE bearers 2.4. QoS requirements 2.5. LTE performance and radio

conditions 2.6. Idle vs. connected states

3. Accessing Data Networks 3.1. Internet access

3.1.1. Internet access architecture 3.1.2. IPv4 and IPv6 3.1.3. IP address management

3.2. Enterprise access 3.2.1. Private IP access from LTE 3.2.2. Alternate connectivity options

4. Interworking with 1xEV-DO

4.1. Review: EV-DO mobility 4.2. Interworking architecture 4.3. Walkthroughs

4.3.1. LTE to EV-DO 4.3.2. EV-DO to LTE

5. Interworking with GPRS/HSPA+ 5.1. Review: UMTS/HSPA+ mobility 5.2. Interworking architecture 5.3. Walkthroughs

5.3.1. LTE to UMTS/HSPA+ 5.3.2. UMTS/HSPA+ to LTE

6. Voice Options for LTE 6.1. Circuit-switched voice 6.2. 3rd-Party VoIP

6.2.1. Over-The-Top (OTT) services

6.2.2. OTT and QoS 6.3. IMS and VoLTE

6.3.1. IMS overview 6.3.1.1. IMS alternatives 6.3.1.2. IMS and QoS 6.3.1.3. High-level IMS

operation 6.3.2. VoLTE: What is it?

6.4. Simultaneous voice and data

Page 17: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

14 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

Technology Trends for Business Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days

Businesses are leveraging emerging technologies to transform their marketing, sales, products, operations and infrastructure to gain competitive advantage. Mobile networks and devices are continually increasing in speed, capability and ubiquity, and Machine-to-Machine connections are growing exponentially. Cloud computing is significantly impacting the computing paradigm, there continues a large-scale convergence toward data and IP networks, and organizational entities are coming together to provide converged value. In the midst of this change, it is difficult to stay informed on the state of our industry. This session is a survey of all of these areas, providing an update on each and seeking to integrate them into a cohesive vision of the industry. The session includes in-class exercises and interaction to reinforce the ways in which these elements work together to add value to the customer. Intended Audience This course is intended for a variety of audiences (Sales, Marketing, Executives, Product Management, etc.) in service providers, enterprises, and government agencies seeking to leverage these trends and their underlying technologies. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Articulate major technology trends impacting enterprises and the telecommunications industry over the next few years

• Discuss some of the key transformations in technologies that business use – voice, collaboration, video, infrastructure etc.

• Explain the BYOD/BYOC trends and associated Mobile Device Management solutions

• Describe the key improvements made by 4G LTE mobile networks and how to truly compare networks

• List and describe core concepts that are at the heart of these technologies including MPLS, VPNs, Video, VoIP, QoS, and Ethernet

• Define M2M, sketch the M2M ecosystem and describe the components

• Describe cloud computing in a sentence and articulate its value and challenges to the enterprise

• List key elements of Unified Communications solutions and describe deployment options

Special Note This course is particularly powerful when combined with information on your business and how it is addressing these trends. We would be happy to work with you to make the content specific to your company.

Course Outline 1. Tomorrow in Perspective

1.1. Market trends 1.2. Technology trends

2. Components of Transformation 2.1. Collaboration

2.1.1. Voice and Video 2.2. Infrastructure 2.3. Automation 2.4. Mobility to all

3. Automation thru M2M 3.1. M2M defined 3.2. The M2M ecosystem 3.3. M2M applications and devices 3.4. M2M service providers 3.5. Implications and challenges 3.6. The competitive landscape

4. Cloud Computing 4.1. Cloud fundamentals

4.1.1. Cloud Computing review 4.1.2. SaaS, PaaS, and IaaS 4.1.3. Cloud models 4.1.4. Implications of the cloud 4.1.5. The Cloud and security

4.2. Cloud services 4.2.1. Cloud Computing 4.2.2. Managed hosting 4.2.3. Co-location

4.3. The competitive landscape

5. The Voice Transformation

5.1. IP telephony 5.2. VoIP, SIP, and IMS 5.3. Enterprise considerations 5.4. Unified Communications 5.5. The competitive landscape

6. Business Connectivity Solutions 6.1. Connectivity fundamentals

6.1.1. VPNs/MPLS/IPv6 6.1.2. Ethernet/optical

6.2. Connecting enterprises 6.2.1. Private WAN 6.2.2. Point-to-point services 6.2.3. Mobile wireless

6.3. The competitive landscape 7. Mobility Solutions

7.1. 3G/4G networks 7.2. 4G services for enterprise 7.3. Enterprise WiFi 7.4. Mobile device management 7.5. The competitive landscape

8. Putting It All Together

Page 18: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

15© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

The World of App Development Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day

There was a time when the term ‘app’ was familiar only to developers buried deep within technology organizations. Today, 10-year-old children discuss apps and purchase and download them from app stores. As apps (and their associated revenue) establish a prominent place in our culture and business models, there is an increasing likelihood that those in the communications industry will be interacting with or near the app development space. As such, they need to be able to speak the language of the app world with accuracy and confidence. The World of App Development provides a foundational understanding of the app world and terms and concepts likely to arise in discussions related to apps and app development. The session includes a high-level demonstration of app development for the Apple iOS or Android development environment. Intended Audience This course is intended for those in sales-related roles with a need to understand and be conversant in the world of mobile application development. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Discuss the current state and near-term trends of the mobile app world

• Provide a concise working description of common concepts in the app development world

• Compare several types of wireless connectivity for mobile apps • List several languages commonly used for app development, and

high-level characteristics of each • Explain the difference between SDKs and APIs and how they

facilitate app development • Describe the end-to-end app development process • Compare and contrast, at a high level, four mobile operating

systems • Describe the common business models in the app world, both for

development and sale of apps and app add-ons • Compare and contrast, at a high level, four app stores • Describe the differences between app development for general

mobile devices and M2M devices

Course Outline 1. App Development Foundations

1.1. The Business of Apps 1.1.1. Market snapshot 1.1.2. Success factors 1.1.3. The app revenue trail 1.1.4. Trends

1.2. Components of mobile applications 1.2.1. Apps and devices

1.2.1.1. Target devices 1.2.1.2. Hardware elements 1.2.1.3. Software elements

(Operating System, Firmware, Apps)

1.2.2. Connectivity 1.2.2.1. Cellular (2G/3G/4G) 1.2.2.2. WiFi 1.2.2.3. Bluetooth 1.2.2.4. NFC 1.2.2.5. Zigbee

1.2.3. Web access and content 1.2.3.1. Browsers 1.2.3.2. Video and interactive

content (HTML5, Flash)

1.2.4. App characteristics 1.2.4.1. Thick vs. thin clients 1.2.4.2. Server applications 1.2.4.3. Data stores

1.2.5. Sample app and interactions

2. The Development Process

2.1. SDKs and APIs 2.2. Development languages and

environments 2.3. Development frameworks 2.4. Data storage and access 2.5. Server applications and web

services 2.6. App development process 2.7. Timelines 2.8. Challenges

3. Mobile OS Platforms 3.1. The mobile OS landscape

3.1.1. Android 3.1.2. Apple iOS 3.1.3. BlackBerry OS 3.1.4. Windows 7

3.2. SDK platforms 3.3. Apps and M2M

4. Development Example 4.1. High-level video or live

walkthrough of app process for iOS or Android

5. Market Channels 5.1. Apple App Store 5.2. Android Marketplace 5.3. Microsoft Marketplace 5.4. Blackberry App World

Page 19: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

16 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

The Mobile Enterprise Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day

Technology and specifically mobile technology has fundamentally changed how business gets done. The Bring Your Own Device (BYOD) wave has demanded companies to respond. Strategies must include Mobile Device Management (MDM), Security, Unified Communications (UC) and cloud. 4G LTE has opened up new ways to leverage the mobile network. Many small to medium business are readily leveraging these technologies and gaining competitive advantages while others are struggling to utilize them effectively. The session provides a description of these technologies, how they inter-relate and how companies of all sizes can take advantage of these technologies. We will demystify the terms, the technology behind the terms and provide examples on how you can successfully transition your company and experience the productivity gains and cost benefits. Intended Audience This course is intended for people involved in helping their company leverage these technology shifts. People in IT, sales, marketing, support, operations etc. can learn what options exists and how they can benefit from each. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Describe the Bring Your Own Device (BYOD) phenomenon and its impact on businesses

• Articulate the need for a Mobile Device Management (MDM) solution and compare some of the different options that exist

• List some of the potential security threats and possible solutions • Explain the cloud beyond the buzz and how it can actually benefit a

company of any size • Compare and contrast some of the cloud solutions • Articulate Unified Communications (UC) and the productivity impact

it can have on your company • Describe some of the possible UC products to consider • List some of the challenges that exist in becoming a mobile

enterprise and some of the potential ways to overcome them • Explain some of the core technologies that enable these mobile

enterprise solutions and their impact to the enterprise

Course Outline 1. Enterprise Technology Trends

1.1. The Bring Your Own Device (BYOD) trend

1.2. Mobility advances 1.3. Consumer trends 1.4. Benefits and challenges

2. Wireless Options 2.1. 3G options 2.2. 4G options (HSPA+, LTE) 2.3. Wi-Fi access

3. Security 3.1. Where are the gaps? 3.2. Types of solutions

3.2.1. Authentication 3.2.2. Encryption 3.2.3. Remote wipe 3.2.4. Dual-persona

3.3. Other considerations 4. Mobile Device Management (MDM)

4.1. Problem scope 4.2. MDM solution features

4.2.1. Application management 4.2.2. Security 4.2.3. Policy control 4.2.4. Inventory management 4.2.5. Service management

4.3. Market solutions 4.3.1. Survey of existing solutions 4.3.2. Comparison of these solutions

5. Unified Communications

5.1. Productivity gains 5.2. Challenges 5.3. Traditional solutions 5.4. On-premise 5.5. Off-premise 5.6. Innovations and new solutions

6. Cloud 6.1. How can it really help your

business 6.2. Types of services 6.3. Deployment models 6.4. Impact to other solutions

7. Case Study 7.1. Strategy 7.2. Planning 7.3. Piloting 7.4. Implementation 7.5. Improving

8. Review

Page 20: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

17© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

Big Data and Business IntelligenceCompanies realize that there is gold buried in the hills of data they are able to gather; the challenge is slicing the data in ways that provide relevant insights and actionable value. The technology changing our world is also changing this game rapidly. Inadditiontotraditionalsourceslikesalesandfinancials,companies now have access to real-time information from sensors and machine-to-machine applications as well as a myriad of information about their customers: what they do, what they like, where they go, and with whom they associate. This session provides an interesting introduction to the world of big data and analytics, including examples of companies that have successfully brought together data from diverse sources to better serve their customers, generate additional revenue, and create differentiated value.

Technology and Consumer PrivacyThe same technology trends that provide convenience and efficiencyarealsobeingleveragedforadvertisingandservicemonetization. This session provides an introduction to the world of consumer privacy and highlights key areas where consumer information is being gathered through technology and used to benefitbusiness.Ithighlightstheareaswherethechiefthreatsto consumer privacy are occurring, and explores how companies might monetize the information they obtain about consumers.

Data Security goes MobileAs consumers are increasingly storing personal information online,usingtheInternetforfinancialtransactions,andusingtheir smartphones for payments, data security is becoming increasingly important for the consumer. In early 2012, Symantec organized a project where they purposefully ‘lost’ Smartphones and monitored them to see what type of information was accessed.Theyfoundthat72%peekedatprivatepictures,45%checkedoutsalaryinformation,47%accessedCloud-baseddocumentsand64%lookedatsocialnetworkinginformation.How can a business ensure that their information, stored upon and accessible from their employees smartphones, is not vulnerable? This session explores the importance of securing mobile devices and information, both corporate and personal.

Social Networking as a Business Productivity ToolEmail is quickly being replaced with new social networking tools as the preferred communications tool in business. Will Facebook, Yammer, LinkedIn, Skype and Twitter, to name a few, prove to be the productivity tools of choice in the coming years for business? Microsoft, with their purchase of Yammer, said they look forward to “enhancing the social capabilities in Microsoft’s communication and collaboration offerings”. This session will go beyond using these as marketing tools and explore their use as communications and collaboration tools to increase productivity in the workplace.

Technology for BusinessTopics of Interest

Page 21: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

18 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

Mobile PaymentsAccording to a survey by the Pew Internet and American Life Project and Elon University’s School of Communications, released April, 2012, more than two-thirds of technology insiders believe that paying with smartphones will overtake cash and credit card payments by 2020. This market is evolving very quickly, with players like Google, ISIS (Verizon, AT&T & T-Mobile), Apple, Paypal, Square, Microsoft and Merchant Customer Exchange (MCX). This sessionwillexplorethekeytechnologiesbeingused,keybenefitsof mobile payments, and the advantages of mobile services over frequent shopper cards or printed coupons.

Hetnets, Small cells and WiFi: Offloading the Cellular NetworkMost of the major US operators have deployed, are deploying, or are planning to deploy more small cells or leverage WiFi to help offloadtheircongestedcellularnetworks.Thissessionexploresthesetechnologiesandthebenefitsanddrawbacksofoneapproach compared to another. It also covers the interoperability between these technologies and what it takes to provide a truly heterogeneous network.

Wireless LandscapeWireless technologies continue to transform the way we live and work. This session provides an update on the cellular industry, exploring the status and trends of wireless operators, technologies and services. Topics include LTE (FDD and TD-LTE), LTE Advanced, HSPA+, VoLTE, RCS and RCSe, and an update on the device ecosystem. For those who need a regular update, these topics are updated periodically and new topics are added as necessary.

Media in Motion: The Approaching Wave of VideoIn2011,Ciscoforecastthatby201590%oftheinternettrafficwillbevideo,andthatabout2/3oftheworld’smobiledatatrafficwill be video by the year 2016. This session explores the nature ofvideotraffic,videoondemand,themultiscreenphenomenon,andthechallengesofdeliveringsomuchtrafficoverourwirelineand wireless networks.

Technology for BusinessTopics of Interest

Page 22: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

19© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

About the CurriculumAward Solutions’ LTE curriculum offers a suite of courses appropriate for all audiences - from executives requiring a quick overview to designers and developers seeking the details of the messages and parameters and also the rationale behind the current standards. It is also appropriate for wireless service providers seeking to understand the capability of the LTE network and ability to design and deploy LTE networks for optimized performance. The curriculum has been designed to address the needs of audiences with a GSM/UMTS background as well as a 1x/1xEV-DO background.

Self-paced eLearning CoursesWelcome to LTELTE OverviewLTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) OverviewLTE Air Interface Signaling OverviewVoLTE Overview*Overview of IPv6 for LTE Networks *COMING SOON

Instructor Led CoursesThe Road to LTE LTE EssentialsLTE Technology OverviewExploring IPv6 for LTE NetworksVoLTE and IMS in LTE-EPC NetworksMastering LTE Air InterfaceLTE Protocols and SignalingMastering TD-LTE Air InterfaceLTE and GSM/UMTS InterworkingLTE-EPC Networks and SignalingLTE-Advanced Technical OverviewLTERFPlanningandDesignCertificationWorkshop

LTEorLongTermEvolutionenablesrichmultimediacontenttomobiledevices.TheLTEtechnologyincludesanewairinterfaceandsimplifiednetworkarchitecture.Itofferssignificantlyhigherdataratesforuserswhilereducingthecost-per-bitforserviceproviders.ThenetworkarchitectureisbasedondistributedunifiedIPnetworkthatimprovesboththroughputandlatency.LTEisakeycomponentoftheevolutionpathforbothUMTS/HSPA+networksand 1x/1xEV-DO networks.

4G LTE

LTE Essentials Instructor Led Course

Instructor Led Courses (continued)LTERANSignalingandOperationsCertification*LTE-EPCCapacityPlanningCertificationWorkshop*NEW*LTERANCapacityPlanningCertificationWorkshop*NEW

Page 23: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

20 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v2.0

Welcome to LTE eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: LTE_109

Long Term Evolution (LTE) is one of the choices for next generation broadband wireless networks and is defined by the 3GPP standards as an evolution to a variety of 3G wireless networks, including both UMTS and 1xEV-DO; its high data rates enable a wide range of advanced multimedia applications. This eLearning course offers a quick, high-level overview of LTE radio and Evolved Packet Core (EPC) networks. The key characteristics of the LTE air interface, access network and core network are defined, along with a review of the capabilities of the LTE user equipment (UE). The services expected to be supported on LTE networks are summarized, with special emphasis on voice solutions. Finally, important considerations for deploying LTE networks are laid out, including the ability to interwork with existing 3G networks. Intended Audience This course is an end-to-end overview of LTE networks, and is targeted for a broad audience. This includes those in sales, marketing, deployment, operations, and support groups. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Identify the motivations and goals for 4G networks • Summarize the basic concepts of LTE Air Interface • Sketch the high-level architectures of the evolved LTE Radio

network (E-UTRAN) and Evolved Packet Core (EPC) • Describe the different categories of LTE UE • Walk through a typical LTE call from power-up to service setup to

disconnect • Define the key services expected on LTE networks • Illustrate the interworking solutions for GSM/UMTS and 1x/1xEV-DO

networks • Explain the important factors to consider when deploying LTE

networks

Knowledge Knuggets 1. Motivations for 4G

1.1. 3G limitations 1.2. LTE goals and targets 1.3. 4G building blocks

2. LTE Network Architecture 2.1. LTE architecture goals 2.2. LTE network components

2.2.1. Evolved UTRAN (E-UTRAN) 2.2.2. Evolved Packet Core (EPC)

3. LTE Devices 3.1. Device categories 3.2. Role of SIM card

4. LTE Air Interface 4.1. Scalable bandwidth 4.2. Supported radio bands 4.3. OFDM/OFDMA concepts 4.4. Multiple antennas in LTE

5. LTE Services 5.1. Typical call setup sequence 5.2. Basic and enhanced services 5.3. Voice and SMS solutions 5.4. IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) 5.5. Policy and Charging Control (PCC)

6. LTE Deployment 6.1. Interworking with GSM/UMTS 6.2. Interworking with 1x/1xEV-DO 6.3. Deployment considerations 6.4. Backhaul options

Page 24: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

21© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v5.0

LTE Overview eLearning | Average Duration: 3 Hours | Course Number: LTE_102

Long Term Evolution (LTE) is one of the choices for next generation broadband wireless networks and is defined by the 3GPP standards as an evolution to a variety of 3G wireless networks such as UMTS and 1xEV-DO. Its high data rates enable advanced multimedia applications. This eLearning course offers a quick and concise overview of LTE networks and the OFDM-based air interface. The LTE network architecture, network interfaces and protocols, air interface and mobility aspects are covered to provide an end-to-end view of the network. A high-level glimpse into the life of an LTE User Equipment (UE) is provided by walking through various stages from power-up all the way to setting up an IP address and exchanging traffic. By the conclusion of this course, the student will understand what LTE offers, its network architecture, how it works, and potential applications and services. Intended Audience This course is an end-to-end overview of LTE networks, and is targeted for a broad audience. This includes those in design, test, sales, marketing, system engineering and deployment groups. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Describe the state of wireless networks and trends for next generation wireless networks

• Sketch the System Architecture Evolution (SAE) for LTE and its interfaces

• Describe OFDM concepts and how it is used in LTE • Define the key features of the LTE air interface • Walk through the mobile device operations from power-up to service

setup • Explain how uplink and downlink traffic are handled in LTE networks • Walk through a high level service flow setup on an end-to-end basis • Explain deployment scenarios of LTE networks

Knowledge Knuggets 1. Setting the stage

1.1. Transition options to LTE 1.2. Trends for next generation wireless

networks 1.3. LTE network changes 1.4. LTE Air interface changes

2. LTE Network Architecture 2.1. System Architecture Evolution (SAE) 2.2. Network architecture and interfaces 2.3. SAE nodes and functions 2.4. E-UTRAN - eNodeB 2.5. Protocol stacks for network interfaces

3. LTE air interface 3.1. Shared radio channel concepts 3.2. OFDM/OFDMA, SOFDMA SC-FDMA

concepts 3.3. Protocol stack 3.4. Air interface channel structure 3.5. Channel characteristics

4. LTE UE operations 4.1. System acquisition 4.2. Synchronization 4.3. Initial access procedures 4.4. Data service setup

5. LTE Traffic handling 5.1. Downlink traffic handling 5.2. Uplink traffic handling

6. LTE Mobility 6.1. Cell selection/reselection 6.2. Handover

7. Deployment

7.1. Typical LTE deployment scenarios 8. Summary

Put It All Together Assess the knowledge of the participant based on the objectives of the course

Page 25: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

22 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v3.0

LTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Overview eLearning | Average Duration: 3 Hours | Course Number: LTE_103

A cellular network consists of a radio network, one or more core networks, and a services network. The LTE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) is the next-generation core network that is expected to replace the existing/legacy core networks. A typical 3G core network consists of a Circuit Switched Core Network (CS-CN) and a Packet Switched Core Network (PS-CN). The EPC is an all-IP packet-switched core network that can connect to a variety of radio networks such as the LTE-based E-UTRAN, WCDMA-based UTRAN, GERAN, CDMA2000 1x, 1xEV-DO/HRPD, and WiMAX. The EPC is formally defined by 3GPP as part of the Evolved Packet System (EPS) that uses an LTE-based EUTRAN. This eLearning course provides an overview of the EPC, including the architecture, basic functions, its role in session setup, and its support for inter-technology mobility. Intended Audience This course is intended for those seeking a fundamental understanding of how EPC works in the next-generation cellular network. This includes those in a design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering, network engineering, or verification role. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Summarize key benefits and challenges of the EPC • Specify roles of various EPC components • Explain the functions (e.g., authentication and security) performed

by the EPC • Describe a high-level session setup using the EPC • Discuss how EPC supports inter-technology handover

Suggested Prerequisites

• Welcome to IP Networking (eLearning)

Complementary Courses • LTE Overview (eLearning)

Knowledge Knuggets 1. Introduction to LTE EPC

1.1. Overall cellular system architecture 1.2. Motivation for the EPC 1.3. Influence of IP convergence 1.4. EPC as part of EPS 1.5. Role of IMS 1.6. Services (VoIP, Web-browsing, and

video streaming) in EPC 2. EPC Architecture

2.1. Core network requirements 2.2. Legacy core networks 2.3. Elements of the EPC (e.g., HSS,

MME, S-GW, and P-GW) and interfaces

3. Major Functions of the EPC 3.1. Authentication and security 3.2. Policy charging and control and QoS 3.3. Packet routing 3.4. Mobility management 3.5. IP address allocation

4. Session Setup using EPC 4.1. Overall call flow 4.2. Interaction between the E-UTRAN

and EPC

5. Seamless Inter-technology

Handover via EPC 5.1. EPC architecture for seamless

mobility 5.2. EPC features in support of

mobility 5.3. Handover scenarios (LTE-UMTS,

LTE-GSM and LTE-1xEV-DO) 6. Summary

Put It All Together Assess the knowledge of the participant based on the objectives of the course

Page 26: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

23© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

LTE Air Interface Signaling Overview eLearning |Duration: 3 Hours | Course Number: LTE_111

Long Term Evolution (LTE) is a leading contender for next generation broadband wireless networks, providing an evolution path for a variety of 3G wireless networks, such as UMTS and 1xEV-DO. LTE offers significantly higher packet data rates, enabling advanced multimedia applications and high-speed Internet access. This eLearning course takes a look at the LTE air interface and Non-Access Stratum (NAS) signaling operations used to establish and maintain LTE calls. The key LTE network components and interfaces are described, and then the steps involved in establishing and managing data calls are illustrated, highlighting the roles of each component and the flow of signaling and data across the network. By the conclusion of this course, the student will have a deeper understanding of how the UE and the network work together to deliver services to LTE subscribers. Intended Audience This course provides an overview of LTE signaling operations, and is targeted for a broad audience for a quick reference to LTE operations. This includes those in engineering, operations, and product sales/marketing. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Sketch the key components of a typical LTE network and the interfaces between them

• List the key channels of DL and UL in LTE • Provide an overview of Call setup and related signaling in LTE • Walk through the steps involved in a Network Attach • Discuss the establishment of EPS bearers • Explain how QoS requirements are managed in LTE • Summarize the cell selection and reselection processes for idle UEs • Illustrate how active connections are maintained during handovers

Suggested Prerequisites

• LTE Overview (eLearning)

Knowledge Knuggets 1. LTE Network Architecture Overview

1.1. E-UTRAN architecture 1.2. EPC (MME, S-GW, P-GW, HSS)

2. LTE Air Interface Signaling Basics 2.1. LTE frame structure 2.2. LTE channels overview

3. System Acquisition 3.1. Initial attach operation 3.2. Default/dedicated bearer setup 3.3. Handovers and idle mobility 3.4. Inter-RAT handovers

4. Network Attachment and Default Bearer

4.1. Attachment steps 4.2. Default bearer setup 4.3. IP address allocation

5. QoS and Dedicated Bearers 5.1. QoS classes 5.2. QoS enforcement 5.3. Dedicated EPS bearers

6. Uplink and Downlink Traffic 6.1. CQI 6.2. DC1 6.3. Downlink traffic operations 6.4. Uplink traffic operations

7. Idle Mode

7.1. S1 release 7.2. Cell reselection 7.3. TAU 7.4. Paging

8. Handover 8.1. Handover types 8.2. Measurement 8.3. Handover stages

9. Summary

Put It All Together Assess the knowledge of the participant based on the objectives of the course

Page 27: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

24 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

VoLTE Overview eLearning | Average Duration: 1.5 Hours | Course Number: LTE_112

The LTE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) is an evolution of the 3GPP system architecture with the vision of an all-IP network finally realized. EPC in conjunction with IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) delivers various services such as VoIP, SMS, Video call, Picture share, IM and Presence. EPC and IMS support interworking with the existing 2G/3G wireless networks as well as PSTN to facilitate smooth migration, seamless mobility and service continuity across these networks. This eLearning module provides an overview of supporting voice services using LTE, which is known as Voice over LTE (VoLTE). LTE-EPC, IMS, and the PCC are discussed as the building blocks for VoLTE. The pre-call operations such as connectivity with the IMS network and IMS registration are explained along with VoLTE call setup and configuration. Interworking between LTE and PSTN is discussed. Basic means of supporting SMS in LTE are also summarized. Intended Audience This course is an overview of Voice over LTE, and is targeted for a broad audience. This audience includes those in planning, Integration, operations, and end-to-end service deployment groups. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• List various solutions for delivering voice in LTE networks. • Describe the role of LTE-EPC, PCC, and IMS in VoLTE. • Specify the roles of key IMS and PCC nodes. • Sketch inter-connectivity of LTE-EPC, IMS, and PCC nodes to deliver

an end-to-end IMS call. • Summarize main steps of pre-call operations such as IMS

registration. • Describe the main steps of setting up a VoLTE call. • Specify how SMS can be supported in LTE.

Suggested Prerequisites

• LTE Overview (eLearning) • Overview of IMS (eLearning)

Knowledge Knuggets 1. Overview of EPS

1.1. Supporting voice services in LTE 1.2. Overall network architecture (EPS,

IMS, PCC) 1.3. Initial attach 1.4. Default vs. dedicated EPS bearers 1.5. Connectivity with IMS APN

2. Connectivity Among EPS, IMS, and PCC 2.1. Overview of IMS elements 2.2. Overview of PCC elements 2.3. QoS model in LTE 2.4. Connectivity of IMS, LTE-EPC & PCC

3. Pre-Call IMS Functions for VoLTE 3.1. PDN connection to IMS 3.2. P-CSCF discovery 3.3. IMS registration

4. VoLTE Call Setup 4.1. Overall steps for an all-IP call 4.2. PCC-IMS interactions 4.3. Dedicated bearer setup

5. VoLTE-Scenarios

5.1. LTE-PSTN interworking and role of IMS

5.2. Overview of Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC)

5.3. Supporting SMS in LTE 6. Summary Put It All Together Assess the knowledge of the participant based on the objectives of the course

Page 28: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

25© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

Overview of IPv6 in LTE Networks (coming soon) eLearning | Average Duration: 3 Hours

Long Term Evolution (LTE) is universally accepted as the next generation broadband wireless system based on an All-IP network. Each LTE device would need at least one IP address to communicate and obtain services like web browsing, machine-to-machine communication, voice and video services, SMS, etc. As the number of IP connected nodes continue to grow, the current IPv4-NAT architecture no longer suffices and we must consider a transition to IPv6 protocol. This eLearning course explores the IPv6 protocol, its features and capabilities and describes how LTE networks assign IPv6 addresses to LTE devices. It describes IPv6 address format, assignment of IPv6 address to LTE devices, dual-stack IPv4v6 addressing to facilitate smooth transition, and IPv4-IPv6 interworking. In conclusion, the student will understand the use of IPv6 addresses and IPv6 operations in LTE networks. Intended Audience This course is an overview of IPv6 addressing formats and IPv6 assignment operation in LTE networks, and is targeted for a broad audience. This includes those in planning, provisioning, operations, and end-to-end service deployment groups. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Sketch LTE-EPC network architecture and identify the role of IPv6 • Analyze the limitations of IPv4 addresses • List the key aspects of IPv6 • Sketch the IPv6 addressing architecture and addressing formats • Discuss different UE IP address allocation schemes in LTE • Describe the use of dual stack IPv4/IPv6 in LTE Networks • Describe some IPv4 and IPv6 interworking scenarios • Explain IPv6 address assignment scenarios of LTE networks

Knowledge Knuggets 1. Setting the Stage

1.1. LTE-EPC network architecture 1.2. PDN connections 1.3. IP address assignment in LTE

2. IPv4 in Wireless Networks 2.1. IPv4 address formats 2.2. Use of public and private addresses 2.3. Mobility support – GTP and mobile IP 2.4. Limitations of IPv4

3. IPv6 Essentials 3.1. Key aspects of IPv6 3.2. Ipv6 header description 3.3. IPv6 addressing

4. IPv6 Assignment in LTE Networks 4.1. Default bearer setup operation 4.2. IPv6 address allocation 4.3. Role of NAS signaling 4.4. Assignment of dual-stack IPv4/IPv6

addresses 5. IPv4/IPv6 Transition Mechanisms

5.1. Dual stack addressing 5.2. Tunnels 5.3. Translators

6. IPv6 Deployment in LTE Networks 6.1. Dual-stack connectivity 6.2. IPv6 migration scenarios

Put It All Together Assess the knowledge of the participant based on the objectives of the course

Page 29: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

26 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.4

The Road to LTE Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day | Course Number: LTE_106

To meet the rapidly growing IP data traffic in wireless networks, wireless service providers have started deploying the next generation wireless networks. The next generation wireless networks need to contain the cost of delivering lots of traffic as the ARPU is not expected to increase at the same rate as the amount of data exchanged over these wireless networks. So, service providers are deploying efficient air interface such as LTE, emerging backhaul and transport technologies (Carrier Ethernet, MPLS) as well as multimedia application framework (IMS) solutions. This course provides an overview of the LTE-EPC and IMS wireless systems and related technologies. Intended Audience This course provides an overview of the LTE and IMS networks and is intended for those in business and non-engineering functions as well as those who are involved in planning, design, and deployment. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• List the key requirements of LTE networks • Sketch the LTE-EPC network components and their interfaces • Describe the role of Policy and Charging Control (PCC) framework to

support QoS in LTE-EPC networks • Sketch the LTE Evolved-UTRAN network and describe the ways of

achieving high data rates and reduced delays in LTE • List the backhaul options and describe the use of Carrier Ethernet

and MPLS in backhaul/backbone networks • Describe the role of IMS in LTE networks and sketch IMS network

architecture • Discuss IMS interworking with legacy networks and Web • Describe the need for IPv6 in LTE networks • Step through example LTE deployment scenarios

Suggested Prerequisites

• Welcome to IP Networking (eLearning) • LTE Overview (eLearning)

Course Outline 1. The Next Generation Network

1.1. Trends in the wireless industry 1.2. State of wireless networks 1.3. Motivation and goals of 4G networks 1.4. 4G evolution landscape 1.5. Building block technologies 1.6. Current status of LTE

2. LTE Radio Network 2.1. All-IP E-UTRAN architecture 2.2. LTE air interface overview 2.3. OFDM and multiple antenna overview 2.4. Peak and achievable data rates 2.5. Spectrum and bandwidth

3. LTE-EPC Networks 3.1. All-IP network architecture 3.2. Network nodes and Interfaces 3.3. Features and services 3.4. PCC framework for QoS support 3.5. Device categories and SIM 3.6. Migration to LTE-EPC network

4. LTE Operations Essentials 4.1. Initial attach/registration 4.2. IP address assignment 4.3. IP network connectivity

5. Backhaul/Backbone for LTE Networks 5.1. Backhaul needs 5.2. Backhaul network architecture 5.3. Backhaul options 5.4. Role of Carrier Ethernet backhaul 5.5. Role of IP/MPLS in backbone

6. IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS)

6.1. IMS benefits and challenges 6.2. IMS network architecture 6.3. End-to-end IMS session setup 6.4. End-to-end QoS model 6.5. Interworking with legacy networks 6.6. Services in IMS

7. Mobility and Interworking 7.1. Need for IPv6 7.2. Interworking with 3G networks 7.3. Deployment scenarios 7.4. Interconnection with IMS and IPX

Page 30: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

27© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.9

LTE Essentials Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day | Course Number: LTE_101

Long Term Evolution (LTE) is a 4th generation wireless network technology based on OFDM and MIMO. It provides much higher data rates (over 100 Mbps) to users while reducing the cost-per-bit for service providers. This is very exciting to wireless operators who are eager to deploy multimedia-rich Internet content over a wireless medium with seamless access anywhere at any time. This one day course provides an overview of LTE from both application and technical aspects. It gives an overview of the network architecture, the underlying technologies of OFDM and multiple antenna techniques, and the call setup procedure. In addition, the deployment and interworking issues are explored. It also describes the competitive landscape by comparing features and services of other 4G systems such as WiMAX. In summary, this course provides a comprehensive high level view of LTE. Intended Audience This course provides a comprehensive high level view of LTE and is intended for those in business and non-engineering functions as well as those who need to understand LTE and its place in the 4G wireless landscape. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• List the key goals and requirements of LTE • Identify the following aspects of LTE networks: ­ System architecture ­ Radio access network and air interface details ­ Applications and Quality of Service (QoS) ­ Call setup procedures ­ Mobility support

• Describe the underlying technologies of LTE: OFDM and MIMO • List key planning aspects of deploying LTE, such as multiple

antennas and backhaul planning Suggested Prerequisites

• LTE Overview (eLearning)

Course Outline 1. LTE Overview

1.1. Trends for 4G networks 1.2. Goals and requirements of LTE 1.3. LTE strengths and challenges

2. LTE/EPC Networks 2.1. Architecture goals 2.2. EPS (SAE) system architecture 2.3. Network nodes and interfaces

3. LTE Air Interface 3.1. Concepts of OFDMA and SC-FDMA 3.2. Multiple antenna techniques in LTE 3.3. LTE frame structure 3.4. Overview of DL/UL channels

4. LTE Services 4.1. QoS support in LTE 4.2. Security in LTE

5. Life of an LTE Mobile 5.1. System acquisition 5.2. Registration and call setup 5.3. Data transmission in DL and UL 5.4. Activities in idle and active modes 5.5. Mobility and handover in LTE

6. LTE Deployment

6.1. Supported frequency spectrums 6.2. Frequency planning 6.3. Multiple antennas planning 6.4. Backhaul planning 6.5. LTE performance examples (VoIP

capacity, throughput, and latency)

Appendix A: Additional Topics A.1 LTE and WiMAX feature

comparison A.2 Interworking of LTE with 3GPP and

Non-3GPP networks

Page 31: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

28 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v2.2

LTE Technology Overview Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: LTE_201

Long Term Evolution (LTE) is a radio technology based on OFDM and MIMO technologies. LTE provides much higher data rates (over 100 Mbps) to users while reducing the cost-per-bit for service providers. This is very exciting to wireless operators who are eager to deploy multimedia rich Internet content over a wireless medium with seamless access anywhere at any time. This course describes the simplified architecture of LTE and moves on to OFDM and MIMO. The course also covers the downlink and uplink frame structure, OFDM operations at the physical layer, and resource management and scheduling considerations at the MAC layer. It steps through system acquisition, call setup, traffic operations and handover. The deployment and interworking issues with 2G/3G wireless networks are also explored. In summary, this course provides a comprehensive overview of LTE technology.

Intended Audience This course provides a comprehensive overview and a technical introduction to LTE. It is suitable for engineers in network planning and design, product design and development, network deployment, network performance, and network operations. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• List the requirements and capabilities of LTE • Explain the network architecture of E-UTRAN and EPC • Sketch the architecture of security, policy and charging control

(PCC), and IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) and their interactions with EPC

• Describe the use of OFDM and multiple antenna techniques in LTE • Describe the key concepts in the LTE air interface • List steps for network acquisition and EPS bearer setup • Describe the traffic operation in DL and UL • List mobility and handover procedures • Describe various ways to support voice and SMS services in LTE

networks • Explain LTE interworking with 2G/3G wireless networks • Identify the planning aspects of deploying an LTE network

Suggested Prerequisites

• LTE Overview (eLearning)

Course Outline 1. Introduction

1.1. 4G technology and market drivers 1.2. Goals and requirements of LTE 1.3. LTE building blocks

2. LTE Architecture and Protocols 2.1. E-UTRAN and EPC 2.2. Roles of eNB, MME, S-GW, P-GW,

and HSS 2.3. Key interfaces: S1, X2, S6a, S5, and

S11 2.4. Role of IMS in LTE networks 2.5. Evolution path from current networks 2.6. UE categories

3. LTE Air Interface 3.1. Orthogonality 3.2. Use of OFDM in LTE 3.3. MIMO (SU-MIMO, MU-MIMO) 3.4. LTE air interface channels

4. Initial Attach 4.1. System acquisition 4.2. Random access procedures 4.3. RRC connection 4.4. Initial attach 4.5. Authentication and security 4.6. Default bearer setup 4.7. IP address allocation

5. QoS Support in LTE

5.1. PCC framework 5.2. EPS bearers and SDFs 5.3. Dedicated bearer setup 5.4. QoS in LTE 5.5. Traffic operations in DL and UL

6. Idle Mode Mobility and Handover 6.1. Idle mode operations 6.2. Cell reselection 6.3. Tracking Area Update 6.4. X2 handover

7. Services in LTE 7.1. Voice support in LTE: CS-Fallback,

VoLTE, and SR-VCC 7.2. Support for SMS

8. Interworking and Deployment 8.1. Interworking with 2G/3G wireless

networks 8.2. Deployment considerations 8.3. Frequency planning 8.4. Capacity planning

Page 32: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

29© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.2

Exploring IPv6 for LTE Networks Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: LTE_202

The roots of the current Internet stretch back over twenty years to its beginnings in academic institutions. The fact that it has been able to adapt and scale to today’s global network is a testament to the solid design principles used in its creation. However, as the number of Internet nodes continues to grow and new demands are expected on it as we evolve our 2G/3G networks to LTE, the current IPv4-NAT architecture no longer suffices and we must consider a transition to an updated protocol. This course explores the IPv6 protocol, which brings not only a vast address space to address millions of billions of network nodes but also a bag of new tricks. Streamlined and simplified, IPv6 incorporates a number of companion protocols into its core specification. This course covers these general topics as well as the adoption of IPv6 in LTE Networks. Intended Audience This is an introductory course and does not assume any previous knowledge of IPv6. It is suitable for wireless professionals who want to gain awareness of IPv4’s real limitations, the key issues with IPv6’s new capabilities, and how to transition the networks. The course assumes basic knowledge of LTE EPC and the LTE Network Architecture and functions. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Sketch LTE-EPC network architecture and identify the role of IPv6 • Analyze the limitations of IPv4 networks • List the key aspects of IPv6 • Sketch the IPv6 addressing architecture and the new types of IP

addresses • Describe the Plug-n-Play capabilities of IPv6 • Describe wireless mobility solutions in IPv6 • Identify the impact of IPv6 on related protocols • Describe the use of dual stack IPv4/IPv6 in LTE Networks • Discuss the different UE IP allocation schemes • Describe some IPv4 and IPv6 interworking scenarios

Suggested Prerequisites

• LTE Overview (eLearning) • LTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Overview (eLearning)

Course Outline 1. LTE-EPC Networks

1.1. LTE-EPC network architecture 1.2. IMS architecture 1.3. PDN connections and APNs 1.4. The role of IP in LTE

2. IPv4 in Wireless Networks 2.1. IP requirements 2.2. IPv4 header description 2.3. IPv4 addressing 2.4. Mobility support 2.5. Issues with IPv4

3. IPv6 Essentials 3.1. Key aspects of IPv6 3.2. IPv4 vs. IPv6 datagrams 3.3. IPv6 addressing 3.4. IPsec 3.5. QoS 3.6. Packet sizes and payloads

4. IPv6-IPv4 Assignment in LTE Networks 4.1. Auto-configuration 4.2. EPS bearers 4.3. Default EPS bearer setup 4.4. IP address allocation

4.4.1. Via NAS signaling 4.4.2. Via IETF approaches

5. IPv4/IPv6 Transition Mechanisms 5.1. Overview 5.2. Dual stack 5.3. Tunnels 5.4. Translators

6. Wireless Mobility in LTE using IPv6

6.1. IP Mobility – the problem 6.2. GPRS Tunneling Protocol (GTP)

7. IPv6 Deployment in LTE Networks 7.1. Dual-stack connectivity 7.2. IPv6 migration scenarios 7.3. Dual-stack deployment combined

with NAPT44 7.4. Gateway-initiated dual-stack lite 7.5. MS/UE IPv6-only deployment

with stateful NAT64 support 7.6. IP in LTE: Example deployment

scenarios

Page 33: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

30 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.3

VoLTE and IMS in LTE-EPC Networks Instructor Led | Duration: 3 Days | Course Number: LTE_203

The LTE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) is an evolution of the 3GPP system architecture with the vision of an all-IP network finally realized. EPC in conjunction with IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) delivers various services such as VoIP, SMS, Video call, Picture share, IM and Presence. EPC and IMS support mobility with the existing 2G/3G wireless networks as well as PSTN to facilitate smooth migration, interworking and service continuity across these networks. This course provides a detailed look at the architecture of the LTE EPC, IMS and QoS framework to deliver end-to-end voice (Voice over LTE – VoLTE) in LTE networks. It also covers various service scenario walk-throughs that utilize IMS and EPC network components. The IMS service architecture and the interaction with existing services are described. Intended Audience This course is designed for those involved in deployment and engineering of next generation wireless networks and services based on LTE-EPC and IMS. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Sketch the EPC architecture and describe the role of various nodes in establishing a data session in LTE for IMS signaling

• Sketch the IMS network architecture and identify the role of key network nodes, interfaces, and related protocols

• List various protocols used in IMS networks to support VoIP • Step through the IMS registration procedure • Explain the role of the PCC network to deliver QoS • Step through the interactions between LTE-EPC and IMS nodes to

establish a VoIP call • Step through the interworking of IMS with non-IMS networks such

as PSTN • Describe the IMS services architecture • Discuss role of AS, RCS, MMTel, and ICS, and support for legacy

services • Sketch the charging architecture in LTE-EPC and IMS networks

Suggested Prerequisites

• Overview of IMS (eLearning) • LTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Overview (eLearning)

Course Outline 1. LTE/EPC Network Essentials

1.1. LTE-EPC network architecture 1.2. Network nodes and roles of HSS,

MME, S-GW, P-GW, and PCRF 1.3. Network interfaces and protocols

2. IMS Architecture 2.1. IMS network architecture 2.2. Role of CSCF, MGCF, MGW, HSS, AS 2.3. User addressing in IMS 2.4. End-to-end signaling and traffic flow

3. Protocols for VoIP and IMS 3.1. Diameter 3.2. SIP and SDP 3.3. H.248 (Megaco) 3.4. RTP and RTCP

4. VoLTE Pre-Call Functions 4.1. PDN connection for IMS APN 4.2. Default EPS bearer setup 4.3. IMS registration 4.4. IMS authentication

5. QoS Framework in LTE-EPC 5.1. QoS classes in LTE-EPC 5.2. PCC architecture 5.3. PCRF, PCEF, and AS 5.4. Interfaces: Gx, Rx 5.5. SDF, SDF aggregation, TFT

6. VoLTE Call Management

6.1. VoIP call setup in IMS 6.2. PCC interactions 6.3. SIP/SDP message details 6.4. Media format considerations 6.5. Emergency calls

7. Interworking in IMS 7.1. IMS – PSTN interworking 7.2. Roaming in IMS 7.3. Role of IPX

8. IMS Services Framework 8.1. Service architecture and role of

AS 8.2. Telephony Application server

(TAS) 8.3. Example supplementary services 8.4. Role of RCS and MMTel

9. SMS over IP Using IMS 9.1. SMS delivery architecture 9.2. SMS origination and termination 9.3. SMS interworking

10. IMS Charging Architecture 10.1. Overview of network nodes 10.2. Offline and online charging

Page 34: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

31© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.8

Mastering LTE Air Interface Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: LTE_301

Long Term Evolution (LTE) is a 4th generation (4G) wireless technology that promises a much higher air interface data rate (over 100 Mbps) to users while reducing the cost per bit for wireless service providers. The building blocks of LTE include OFDM, multiple antenna techniques, and all-IP technologies. Multiple antennas can increase data rates, throughput, coverage, and lower battery consumption in a mobile device. This course provides an in-depth discussion of the LTE air interface. First, it introduces the LTE/E-UTRAN network architecture and protocols. It then provides comprehensive coverage of the frame structure, channels, resource allocation, and multiple antenna techniques. Finally, the course discusses the operations of acquisition, system access, data session setup, DL and UL traffic operations and handovers. Intended Audience This is a detailed technical course, primarily intended for a technical audience, including those in RF design, development, integration, deployment and systems engineering. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Sketch the LTE/E-UTRAN network architecture and associated interfaces and protocols

• Sketch the frame structure and resource mapping for DL and UL • List various multiple antenna techniques of LTE • List LTE channels in DL and UL and map them on the frame

structure • Describe the synchronization operation and use of sync and

reference signals • Step through the system access and data session setup procedure • Describe traffic operations in DL – CQI reporting, scheduling, MCS

selection and HARQ feedback • Describe traffic operations in UL – Scheduling request, UL grants,

UL transmission and HARQ feedback • Explain key concepts of LTE mobility and handovers

Suggested Prerequisites

• LTE Overview (eLearning)

Course Outline 1. Introduction

1.1. Goals and requirements of LTE 1.2. E-UTRAN nodes and interfaces 1.3. LTE air interface protocols 1.4. UE categories 1.5. Life of a UE in LTE

2. LTE Air Interface Essentials 2.1. OFDMA and SC-FDMA 2.2. PHY frame structure 2.3. PHY channels and signals 2.4. MIMO techniques in LTE

3. System Acquisition 3.1. DL synchronization 3.2. PCI determination 3.3. MIB and SIB processing 3.4. System selection

4. System Access Operation 4.1. Random access procedure 4.2. UL synchronization 4.3. RRC connection establishment

5. Data Session Setup 5.1. Initial attach 5.2. Default EPS bearer setup

6. Downlink Operations

6.1. DL transmission process 6.2. Channel quality indicator (CQI)

reporting 6.3. DL scheduling and resource

allocation 6.4. DL data transmission and HARQ 6.5. DL operations using MIMO

7. Uplink Operations 7.1. UL transmission process 7.2. Bandwidth requests 7.3. UL scheduling and resource

allocation 7.4. UL data transmission and HARQ

8. Mobility and Power Control 8.1. Cell selection 8.2. Cell reselection and tracking area

update 8.3. PHY measurements 8.4. LTE handover overview 8.5. Power control in LTE

Appendix A: OFDM Essentials A.1. Orthogonality in OFDM A.2. Cyclic Prefix for ISI A.3. OFDM transmitter/receiver block

diagram

Page 35: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

32 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.8

LTE Protocols and Signaling Instructor Led | Duration: 3 Days | Course Number: LTE_302

LTE promises dramatic improvements in throughput and latency, which opens a new era in Quality of Service (QoS). These enhancements are based on several fundamental pillars: A new air interface (OFDM+MIMO), simplified network architecture and efficient air interface structure and signaling mechanisms. This course takes a detailed look at the layer 2 and 3 signaling procedures as defined in 3GPP specifications. The main focus is on UE-E-UTRAN and UE-EPC signaling. The course also provides an overview of the end-to-end default and dedicated EPS bearer setup including QoS considerations. Intra-LTE mobility and LTE-non-LTE interworking are also illustrated. Intended Audience This course is primarily intended for a technical audience in design, test, systems engineering or product support that wants to understand LTE signaling details. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Sketch the network architecture of LTE • Explain the detailed setup of the RRC connection between the UE

and the E-UTRAN • Describe the roles of the MAC, RLC, PDCP, and RRC protocols • Describe the roles of protocols associated with S1, X2, and NAS • Illustrate the initial attach operation • Explain the implementation of QoS and security • Summarize traffic operations for UL and DL • Describe various handover scenarios and the associated signaling

procedures • Describe interworking between LTE and 3GPP systems and LTE and

non-3GPP systems Suggested Prerequisites

• LTE Overview (eLearning)

Course Outline 1. LTE Network Architecture

1.1. Architecture and node functions 1.2. Interfaces and associated protocols 1.3. Identities of the UE, E-UTRAN, and

EPC 2. LTE-Uu Interface Protocols

2.1. PHY frame and channels 2.2. MAC, RLC, PDCP, and RRC

3. E-UTRAN and NAS Protocols 3.1. S1 and X2 interfaces and associated

protocols 3.2. NAS states and functions 3.3. GTPv1 and GTPv2

4. System Acquisition 4.1. Power-up synchronization 4.2. System Information Blocks

5. System Access 5.1. Random access 5.2. RRC connection setup 5.3. Timing alignment 5.4. DRX operation 5.5. Power control

6. Attach to the Network 6.1. Overview of attach 6.2. Selection of MME 6.3. Authentication and key agreement 6.4. Integrity protection and encryption 6.5. AS and NAS security

7. Initial PDN Connection

7.1. S-GW and P-GW selection 7.2. Default bearer setup 7.3. IP address allocation

8. Idle Mode and Paging 8.1. Paging operation 8.2. Tracking area update

9. Service Establishment and QoS 9.1. QoS parameters 9.2. EPS bearers and TFTs 9.3. PCC architecture

10. Traffic and Bandwidth Management

10.1. Channel quality reporting 10.2. DL/UL scheduling 10.3. DL/UL traffic operations

11. Mobility 11.1. X2-based mobility 11.2. S1-based mobility

12. Interoperability 12.1. Measurement 12.2. 3GPP mobility 12.3. Non-3GPP mobility

Page 36: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

33© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

Mastering TD-LTE Air Interface Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days

Time Division Duplex Long Term Evolution (TDD LTE or TD-LTE) is a 4th generation (4G) cellular technology that promises a much higher air interface data rate (over 100 Mbps) to users while reducing the cost per bit for wireless service providers. The building blocks of TD-LTE include OFDM, multiple antenna techniques, and all-IP technologies. Multiple antenna techniques could increase data rates, throughput, coverage, and lower battery consumption in a mobile device. This course provides an in-depth discussion of the PHY and MAC layers of the TD-LTE air interface. First, it introduces the E-UTRAN network architecture and protocols. The Type 2 PHY frame structure, channels, resource allocation, and multiple antenna techniques are described. Finally, the course discusses the operations of acquisition, system access, data session setup, DL and UL traffic operations and handover. Intended Audience This is a detailed technical course, primarily intended for a technical audience, including those in product design and development, integration and testing, and system engineering. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Sketch the network architecture • Specify air interface protocols • Draw PHY Type 2 frame structure and resource mapping for DL and

UL • Mention roles of DL and UL PHY channels • Describe the synchronization operation and use of reference signals • Summarize the system acquisition and data session setup

procedure • Describe traffic operations in DL and UL at the PHY/MAC layers • Explain cell reselection and handover • Identify the key multiple antenna techniques for the DL and the UL

and specify their applications Suggested Prerequisites

• Overview of OFDM (eLearning) • Multiple Antenna Techniques (eLearning) • LTE Overview (eLearning)

Course Outline 1. Introduction

1.1. Motivation for TD-LTE or TDD LTE 1.2. Goals and requirements of LTE 1.3. LTE network nodes and interfaces 1.4. Comparison of FDD LTE & TDD LTE 1.5. LTE air interface protocols 1.6. Life of a mobile in LTE

2. TD-LTE Technology 2.1. Access techniques – OFDMA and SC-

FDMA 2.2. TD-LTE Type 2 frame structure 2.3. S- Subframe and subframe patterns 2.4. TD-LTE DL/UL configurations 2.5. PHY channels and resource mapping

3. System Acquisition 3.1. DL synchronization in TD-LTE 3.2. System selection

4. System Access Operation 4.1. UL synchronization 4.2. TD-LTE random access procedure 4.3. TD-LTE preamble configurations 4.4. RRC connection establishment

5. TD-LTE Call Setup 5.1. Initial attach 5.2. EPS bearer setup

6. Downlink Operations

6.1. DL transmission process 6.2. Channel quality reporting 6.3. DL scheduling and resource

allocation 6.4. Data transmission in DL Subframe 6.5. Data transmission in S-Subframe 6.6. HARQ bundling and multiplexing 6.7. DL operations using MIMO

7. Uplink Operations 7.1. UL transmission process 7.2. Bandwidth requests 7.3. UL scheduling and resource

allocation 7.4. UL data transmission and HARQ 7.5. TTI bundling 7.6. UL operations using MIMO

8. Mobility and Power Control 8.1. Tracking area 8.2. Cell reselection 8.3. Paging 8.4. Handover message flow 8.5. Power control in TD-LTE

Appendix A: OFDM Essentials (OFDM/OFDMA and SC-FDMA)

Appendix B: Advanced Antenna Techniques

Page 37: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

34 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.6

LTE and GSM/UMTS Interworking Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: LTE_304

The major focus of this course is the interworking between UMTS/HSPA and LTE. The course begins with a brief overview of LTE and 3GPP 2G/3G network architectures and requirements for interworking. The building blocks that support interworking between LTE and UMTS/HSPA are discussed in detail, including the new interfaces, hybrid device capabilities, and radio/core network mechanisms. Different interworking/mobility scenarios are listed and detailed message flows are given. LTE is optimized for the delivery of IP services including VoIP. It can also cooperate with a 2G/3G network to support a Circuit-Switched (CS) call using features such as Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC) and CS fallback. The course also previews IP mobility mechanisms, security, and QoS considerations. In summary, the course provides both the architectural features and the detailed message flows of the interworking between LTE and 3GPP 2G/3G.

Intended Audience This course is designed for those involved in the evolution and migration of UMTS/HSPA networks to LTE networks. It is suitable for planners and engineers responsible for network planning, design and deployment, integration and network operations. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Sketch the LTE architecture, including interfaces to GERAN/UTRAN • Describe components/interfaces that make up the LTE core

network and their roles in the interworking • List requirements for LTE and 2G/3G interworking • Sketch the interworking architecture of LTE and GERAN/UTRAN • Walk through an LTE session setup • Enumerate the steps involved in idle mode mobility • Walk through the steps of an active mode handover • Discuss the role of IMS in LTE • Define SRVCC and CS fallback

Suggested Prerequisites

• LTE Overview (eLearning) • LTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Overview (eLearning) • LTE Technology Overview (Instructor Led)

Course Outline 1. Interworking: Executive Summary

1.1. Evolution from 2G/3G to LTE 1.2. Interworking architecture (Gn-SGSN

and S4-SGSN) 1.3. Voice and SMS interworking 1.4. Overview of interworking scenarios

2. Interworking Network Architecture 2.1. Pre-R8 and R8 UMTS and GERAN

architecture 2.2. Interworking architecture – Pre-R8

and R8 2.3. Non-roaming and roaming

architecture 2.4. Network interfaces between

UMTS/GERAN and EPC 2.5. Network identities 2.6. GTPv1 and GTPv2

3. Initial Session Setup 3.1. LTE EPS Attach procedure 3.2. UMTS PDP context activation 3.3. EPS QoS 3.4. UMTS QoS

4. Connected Mode Interworking 4.1. Connected mode IRAT HO 4.2. LTE and UMTS measurements 4.3. LTE UTRAN handover and UTRAN

LTE handover with S4-SGSN

4.4. LTE UTRAN handover and

UTRAN LTE handover with Gn-SGSN

4.5. LTE-GERAN interworking 5. Idle Mode Interworking

5.1. Idle mode cell reselection 5.2. Idle mode measurements 5.3. System Information Blocks 5.4. PLMN selection

6. Circuit-Switched Interworking 6.1. IMS overview 6.2. Voice in LTE using IMS 6.3. CS fallback 6.4. SRVCC 6.5. IMS service centralization and

continuity

Page 38: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

35© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.9

LTE-EPC Networks and Signaling Instructor Led | Duration: 3 Days | Course Number: LTE_305

The LTE Evolved Packet System (EPS) is an evolution of the 3GPP system architecture with the vision of an all-IP network finally realized. EPS consists of the Evolved UTRAN (E-UTRAN) and Evolved Packet Core (EPC). EPC supports mobility with the existing 3GPP and non-3GPP wireless networks to facilitate smooth migration, interworking, and service continuity across these networks. The EPC and E-UTRAN will be optimized for the delivery of IP-based services. EPS will use IMS as the services network and manage QoS across the system, enabling a dynamic mix of voice, video, and data services. This course provides a detailed look at the architecture of the EPC and the signaling among the UE, E-UTRAN and EPC network components. Intended Audience This course is designed for those involved in development, integration, deployment and engineering of LTE-EPC wireless systems. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Sketch the EPC architecture • Describe the components that make up the EPC and their roles • List the key protocols of LTE-EPC like NAS, GTP and Diameter • Explain how authentication and security are achieved in the EPC • Describe the different options for IP address allocation • Describe an EPS bearer setup • Explain the role of the PCC network • Explain how services are added and how QoS requirements are

managed • Describe connectivity to multiple APNs (PDN connections) • Explain X2- and S1-based handovers • Describe deployment considerations

Suggested Prerequisites

• LTE Overview (eLearning) • LTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Overview (eLearning)

Course Outline 1. LTE-EPC Network Architecture

1.1. Roaming and non-roaming architecture

1.2. Roles of HSS, MME, S-GW, P-GW, and PCRF

1.3. Key features and services 2. LTE-EPC Protocols

2.1. Roles of EMM and ESM 2.2. GTPv2-C and GTP-U 2.3. Roles of SCTP and diameter

3. LTE-EPC Signaling Fundamentals 3.1. Network and UE identities 3.2. EPS and signaling bearers 3.3. PDN connections and APNs

4. Security in LTE-EPC 4.1. Security architecture 4.2. Authentication and Key Agreement

(AKA) 4.3. NAS and AS security

5. Network Access in LTE-EPC 5.1. Initial attach procedure 5.2. MME, S-GW and P-GW selection 5.3. Default EPS bearer setup 5.4. IP address allocation

6. QoS Framework in LTE-EPC 6.1. PCC architecture 6.2. AF, PCRF, PCEF, SPR 6.3. QoS class identifiers 6.4. Traffic flow templates

7. Session Establishment and PDN

Connectivity 7.1. Dedicated EPS bearer setup 7.2. Multiple PDN connectivity 7.3. EMM states 7.4. Paging operation 7.5. Dedicated bearer deactivation 7.6. Dedicated bearer modification

8. Intra-LTE Mobility 8.1. X2-based handover 8.2. S1-based handover 8.3. Tracking area updates

9. IMS and Support for Voice 9.1. IMS and seamless mobility 9.2. Circuit-Switched Fallback (CSFB) 9.3. Voice Call Continuity (VCC) 9.4. Single Radio Voice Call Continuity

(SRVCC) 10. Deployment Considerations

10.1. Evolving to EPC network 10.2. Interworking with Release 8 and

Pre-Release 8 3GPP networks 10.3. Interworking with Non-3GPP

networks 11. End-to-End Flow

11.1. Review of attach procedure 11.2. Review of service addition

Page 39: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

36 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.2

LTE-Advanced Technical Overview Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: LTE_310

To meet the rapidly growing IP data traffic demand cost-effectively and to improve cell-edge performance, 3GPP has defined the evolution of Release 8 LTE called LTE-Advanced. LTE-Advanced is introduced in Release 10 of 3GPP. Some of the LTE-Advanced features are targeted for Release 11 and beyond. LTE-Advanced is designed to meet or exceed the requirements of IMT-Advanced such as the support for the data rate of 1 Gbps and bandwidths up to 100 MHz. LTE-Advanced system is backward compatible with LTE. This course provides a technical overview of LTE-Advanced, describing the features such as carrier aggregation, enhanced advanced antenna techniques for the DL and the UL, relays, and coordinated multipoint (CoMP) transmission and reception. In summary, this course provides a technical overview of R10 and beyond. Intended Audience This course is intended for those involved in engineering functions such as planning, product management, design and deployment as well as those who need to understand LTE-Advanced and its place in the 4G wireless landscape. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• List the performance targets for IMT-Advanced and LTE-Advanced • Summarize architectural enhancements relative to Release 8 • Describe the key features of Release 10 LTE-Advanced • Explain the key features of LTE-Advanced beyond Release 10 • Identify the enhancements required in an LTE network to migrate to

LTE-Advanced • Give examples of deployment scenarios for LTE-Advanced including

heterogeneous networks (HetNets) Suggested Prerequisites

• LTE Overview (eLearning) • Mastering LTE Air Interface (Instructor Led)

Course Outline 1. Overview of LTE-Advanced

1.1. Evolution from Release 8 LTE to LTE-Advanced

1.2. Performance targets of IMT-Advanced and LTE-Advanced

1.3. Summary of LTE-Advanced features 2. EPS Network Architecture

2.1. R8 architecture 2.2. Enhanced HeNBs with support for

mobility 2.3. Relays 2.4. UE categories

3. Network Acquisition and Attach 3.1. Power-up system acquisition 3.2. Random access 3.3. Attach 3.4. Overview of data transmission in DL

and UL 4. Release 10 Air Interface

Enhancements 4.1. Carrier aggregation 4.2. Enhanced multiple antenna

techniques for DL and UL 4.3. SON enhancements (e.g.,

minimization of drive tests)

5. Release 11 and Beyond

5.1. Coordinated multipoint (CoMP) transmission and reception

5.2. Heterogeneous networks (HetNets) and eICIC

5.3. Interference cancellation 6. Mobilty for an LTE-Advanced UE

6.1. Cell reselection and handover 6.2. Idle to connected transition 6.3. Dormant to active transition

7. Deployment Considerations 7.1. Migration to LTE-Advanced 7.2. HetNet and SON considerations 7.3. Interworking of LTE-Advanced with

other RATs Appendix Release 9 Enhancements

Page 40: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

37© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.7

LTE RF Planning and Design Certification Workshop Instructor Led | Duration: 5 Days | Course Number: LTE_401

The LTE system supports broadband wireless access in a mobile cellular environment, and is considered a 4G wireless system, offering data rates in the range of 100 Mbps. The LTE system is based on the OFDM-based radio air interface. The LTE system also deploys advanced antenna techniques to increase the throughput, coverage and capacity of the network. Thus, deploying the LTE system provides a unique and challenging opportunity. This workshop covers the radio network planning and design aspects of an LTE network and describes the process of mapping the service and market requirements to RF system parameters. Typical parameter settings used in commercial networks are discussed. This certification workshop utilizes several hands-on exercises and a coverage prediction tool for RF design project and concludes with a certification assessment. Intended Audience This workshop provides practical examples and intertwines the exercises at every stage of the RF planning and design process and is intended for LTE system designers, RF systems engineering, network engineering, deployment and operations personnel. Learning Objectives After completing this workshop, the student will be able to:

• Explain the process of radio network planning and design • Describe the frame structure, DL and UL channels, and key

measurements like RSRP and RSRQ of the LTE air interface • Map the network requirements to corresponding system parameters • Step through the UL and DL link budget for the LTE system • Design the radio network based on coverage and capacity

requirements • Explain multiple antenna techniques in LTE and selection

considerations • Describe key configuration and operational parameters • Discuss parameter settings for a typical commercial network • Identify the key performance indicators of LTE radio network • Describe the key parameters related to Inter-RAT operation

Required Equipment

• PC laptop with administrator privileges Suggested Prerequisites

• Overview of OFDM (eLearning) • LTE Overview (eLearning) • LTE Technology Overview (Instructor Led)

Course Outline 1. Overview of Radio Network Design

1.1. Radio network design goals, inputs and outputs

1.2. Radio network planning process 2. LTE Air Interface

2.1. FDD frame structure 2.2. PHY channels and signals 2.3. Resource element and RBs 2.4. UE measurement: RSRP and RSRQ 2.5. Exercises of RSRP/RSRQ

3. Market and Engineering Requirements 3.1. Coverage/capacity/QoS 3.2. System configuration considerations 3.3. Engineering requirements

4. Link Budget for LTE 4.1. Cell edge throughput calculations 4.2. Link budget for UL and DL 4.3. Role of RRH and TMA 4.4. Exercises of UL/DL link budget

5. RF Design Considerations 5.1. RF design guidelines 5.2. RF design tool configuration 5.3. Coverage prediction 5.4. Exercises: Coverage and interference

6. MIMO Antenna Considerations 6.1. Multiple antenna techniques in LTE 6.2. Antenna technique switching 6.3. Antenna selection criteria 6.4. Antenna sharing considerations

6.5. Exercise: Coverage predictions

using MIMO 7. Capacity Planning in LTE

7.1. Data traffic modeling and capacity predictions

7.2. Sector throughput calculations 7.3. Backhaul capacity planning 7.4. Triggers for capacity planning 7.5. Simulation exercise

8. RF Configuration Parameters 8.1. PCI planning guidelines 8.2. UL Reference signal planning 8.3. RA Preamble planning

9. RF Operational Parameters 9.1. Cell selection/reselection

parameters 9.2. Handover parameters 9.3. Power control parameters

10. KPIs in LTE Radio Network 10.1. User-centric KPIs 10.2. Network performance KPIs 10.3. System utilization KPIs

11. Interworking with 2G/3G 11.1. System selection/reselection 11.2. Inter-RAT handover parameters

Page 41: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

38 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.6

LTE RAN Signaling and Operations Certification Instructor Led | Duration: 5 Days | Course Number: LTE_405

Long Term Evolution (LTE) is an all-IP wireless system that promises dramatic improvements in throughput and latency. The LTE enhancements are based on several fundamental pillars: a new air interface (OFDM+MIMO), simplified network architecture and efficient air interface structure and signaling mechanisms. This course takes a detailed look at various call scenarios of the LTE radio network using signaling messages and related parameters. It provides details of system access, initial attach, default/dedicated bearer setup, handovers and inter-RAT operations. At appropriate instances, the LTE operations are compared with similar operations of 1x/1xEV-DO or UMTS networks. This certification workshop utilizes several hands-on exercises, a drive-test tool, and concludes with a certification assessment. Intended Audience This course is primarily intended for a technical audience in RF engineering, systems engineering, network engineering, support, operations, and anyone seeking a more in depth understanding of LTE signaling details. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Sketch the network architecture of the LTE E-UTRAN and EPC • List and describe the use of DL and UL channels of LTE • Step through the system acquisition process in LTE and understand

the system selection parameters • Analyze the UE logs to get deeper understanding of system access

parameters of SIB 2 • Step through the system access and the initial attach operation,

including security and IP address assignment • Explain the implementation and enforcement of QoS for calls such

as VoIP • Summarize traffic operations for UL and DL • Describe various handover scenarios and the associated signaling

procedures • Describe inter-system handover mechanisms, in particular the LTE

to 3G/2G scenario Suggested Prerequisites

• LTE Overview (eLearning) • LTE Technology Overview (Instructor Led)

Course Outline 1. LTE Network Architecture

1.1. E-UTRAN architecture 1.2. LTE-Uu, S1 and X2 interfaces 1.3. Protocols of LTE RAN

2. LTE Air Interface 2.1. LTE frame structure of DL and UL 2.2. LTE channels overview 2.3. Identities of UE, eNB and EPC

3. System Acquisition 3.1. Cell-ID detection and synchronization 3.2. System Information Blocks (SIBs) 3.3. RF configuration and operations

parameters 4. Connecting to LTE RAN

4.1. Random access operation 4.2. UE and eNB timing alignment 4.3. RRC connection setup

5. Attach to the Network 5.1. Authentication 5.2. Selection of MME, S-GW, and P-GW 5.3. Default bearer establishment 5.4. AS and NAS security

6. Quality Of Service in LTE 6.1. QoS parameters 6.2. Dedicated EPS bearers and TFTs 6.3. Dedicated bearer setup 6.4. Data radio bearers in LTE

7. Traffic and Bandwidth Management

7.1. DL traffic processing 7.2. Feedback: CQI, PMI, RI 7.3. UL traffic processing 7.4. Buffer status reports 7.5. Scheduling 7.6. Time alignment 7.7. Closed loop power control 7.8. Discontinuous reception

8. Mobility and Idle Mode 8.1. Types of measurements 8.2. Cell reselection and TAU

operation 8.3. Paging operation 8.4. DRX operation in Idle mode

9. Handover 9.1. Measurement configuration 9.2. Measurement types 9.3. Handovers 9.4. X2-based handovers 9.5. S1-based handovers

10. Interoperability 10.1. Comparison of measurements

between LTE and 2G/3G 10.2. Inter-RAT handover preparation 10.3. Inter-RAT handover execution

Certification Assessment

Page 42: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

39© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

LTE-EPC Capacity Planning Certification Workshop Instructor Led | Duration: 4 Days

LTE (Long Term Evolution) uses the Evolved Packet Core (EPC) architecture, a distributed and unified IP-based core network, to efficiently deliver Internet services to mobile wireless subscribers. This course describes typical LTE network architecture and deployment strategies, as the starting point for understanding the planning and design principles for the EPC. Students build up a network call model, determining the node and interface requirements needed to support the expected user traffic and signaling demands. Subscriber traffic demand, basic LTE operations, mobility and idle state functions, and interworking scenarios are all factored in to the model. Finally, redundancy and load balancing considerations are factored in, resulting in a network design that meets the market’s needs. This certification workshop includes several hands-on exercises and concludes with a certification assessment. Intended Audience This course is designed for network engineers, architects, and managers involved in planning, design, deployment and operation of LTE-EPC networks. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Define the key components of the LTE-EPC network models and determine the necessary inputs and expected outputs

• Describe the logical and physical LTE network architecture • Create a subscriber demand (traffic) model and estimate the impact

on the EPC user plane • Map typical LTE signaling operations to the corresponding nodes

and interfaces and model their impacts on the EPC control plane • Quantify the impact of IMS and PCC services on the EPC user and

control planes • Use the resulting network model to design an EPC network capable

of supporting the subscriber demand Required Equipment

• PC laptop Suggested Prerequisites

• LTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Overview (eLearning) • LTE-EPC Networks and Signaling (Instructor Led)

Course Outline 1. EPC Network Planning

1.1. Network planning process 1.2. Subscriber demand modeling 1.3. Event impact modeling 1.4. Node and link capacity modeling

2. LTE EPC Design Considerations 2.1. Logical and physical architecture 2.2. Geographic distribution 2.3. 3G interworking 2.4. Network design goals 2.5. EPC node and link capabilities 2.6. Capacity requirements

3. Subscriber Traffic Modeling 3.1. Subscriber demand model 3.2. Elastic vs. inelastic traffic 3.3. VoIP requirements 3.4. Effective bandwidth estimation 3.5. Subscriber demand estimation 3.6. Connection and bearer requirements 3.7. Traffic modeling exercise

4. LTE Signaling Event Modeling 4.1. Event impact model 4.2. Network attach signaling 4.3. Default bearer establishment 4.4. MME pools and selection 4.5. Idle/connected transitions 4.6. Signaling event modeling exercise

5. LTE Mobility Modeling

5.1. X2-based handover signaling 5.2. S1-based handover signaling 5.3. Mobility modeling exercise

6. Idle State Modeling 6.1. Tracking area planning 6.2. Paging strategies 6.3. Idle state modeling exercise

7. 3G Interworking Modeling 7.1. Circuit-Switched Fallback (CSFB) 7.2. SMS signaling 7.3. Inter-RAT mobility 7.4. Interworking modeling exercise

8. IMS and PCC Modeling 8.1. IMS network nodes and interfaces 8.2. Policy and Charging Control (PCC) 8.3. End-to-end VoIP call 8.4. Dedicated bearer establishment 8.5. IMS and PCC modeling exercise

9. LTE-EPC Design Case Study 9.1. Transaction requirements 9.2. Bearer requirements 9.3. Subscriber requirements 9.4. Bandwidth requirements 9.5. Impact of demand changes

Certification Assessment

Page 43: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

40 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

LTE RAN Capacity Planning Certification Workshop Instructor Led | Duration: 3 Days

This course defines a practical approach to LTE RAN capacity planning, and applies the concepts to design and augment LTE network. Throughout the class, students build up RAN capacity models based on typical network operations, determining the eNB, air interface and backhaul requirements needed to support the expected user traffic and signaling demands. In addition, E-UTRAN counters and KPIs are defined to allow operators to measure and assess the performance of the network, to identify potential system bottlenecks. Typical LTE operations and mobility requirements are factored in, resulting in a RAN design that meets the expected demand and is capable of growing to support future services. This certification workshop utilizes several hands-on exercises to build a capacity planning model and concludes with a certification assessment. Intended Audience This course is designed for RAN and systems engineers involved in capacity planning, design, deployment and operation of LTE network. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Define the key components of the LTE RAN network models and determine the necessary inputs and expected outputs

• Create a subscriber demand (traffic) model and estimate the impact on the user plane for both data and VoIP services

• Map typical LTE signaling operations to the corresponding nodes and interfaces and model their impacts on the control plane

• Determine the air interface capacity and expected cell throughput for the subscriber demand

• Estimate VoLTE user capacity • Use network counters and KPIs to assess potential air interface and

software licensing bottlenecks Required Equipment

• PC laptop Suggested Prerequisites

• LTE Overview (eLearning) • Mastering LTE Air Interface (Instructor Led)

Course Outline 1. Prologue

1.1. E-UTRAN architecture 1.2. RAN capacity constraints 1.3. Capacity planning model

2. RAN Capacity Planning 2.1. Physical and logical interfaces 2.2. eNB node and link capability 2.3. Subscriber and event models 2.4. Capacity requirements

3. Subscriber Traffic Modeling 3.1. Subscriber demand model 3.2. Elastic vs. inelastic traffic 3.3. VoIP/Video bandwidth requirements 3.4. Effective bandwidth estimation 3.5. Subscriber demand estimation 3.6. Connection and bearer requirements 3.7. Traffic modeling exercise

4. LTE Signaling Event Analysis 4.1. Event impact model 4.2. Network attach 4.3. Default bearer establishment 4.4. Dedicated bearer establishment 4.5. Idle/connected transitions 4.6. Signaling capacity impact 4.7. Signaling event model exercise

5. LTE Mobility Event Analysis

5.1. X2-based handover 5.2. S1-based handover 5.3. Impact of Paging and TAU 5.4. IRAT transitions 5.5. Mobility impact exercise

6. Air Interface Capacity Analysis 6.1. Air interface constraints 6.2. Expected cell throughput 6.3. Resource Block utilization 6.4. Capacity planning for VoIP 6.5. Backhaul considerations 6.6. Capacity monitoring (counters,

KPIs) examples 6.7. Capacity planning exercise

7. LTE RAN Design Case Study 7.1. Transaction requirements 7.2. Bearer requirements 7.3. Subscriber requirements 7.4. Bandwidth requirements 7.5. Impact of demand changes 7.6. Capacity growth strategies

Certification Assessment

Page 44: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

41© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

MobilewirelessnetworksareevolvingatarapidpacetoofferfasterandmoreefficientInternetconnectivityandadvancedmultimediacommunications.Network operators, service providers, and equipment vendors are faced with major decisions to position themselves for the future. True capabilities, current deployment status, and potential commercial impact of the many emerging technologies and standards are being debated.

The next wave of wireless technologies will provide over 100 Mbps data rates using a OFDM radio interface, multiple antenna techniques and an IP-based distributed network architecture. A thorough understanding of the fundamental changes introduced by these emerging technologies, as well as the resulting opportunities and challenges, is a must for wireless professionals.

About the CurriculumAward Solutions’ Emerging Trends curriculum focuses on technologies on the horizon. The focus of this curriculum is on enabling technologies for wireless multimedia services. In addition, recent standardization, research and industry activities are addressed.

Self-paced eLearning CoursesOverview of OFDMMultiple Antenna TechniquesWi-Fi Overview

Instructor Led Courses*WiFi Technical Overview *NEW

Emerging Trends

Multiple Antenna Techniques eLearning Course

Page 45: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

42 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v3.0

Overview of OFDM eLearning | Average Duration: 2 Hours | Course Number: TRND103

Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) is a transmission technique used to achieve very high data rates. OFDM is the technology of choice for all major wireless systems including Wireless LAN – 802.11, WiMAX – 802.16, digital audio/video broadcast systems such as Digital Video Broadcast – Handheld (DVB-H), Media FLO, and the air interface evolution of 3G Wireless systems based on 3GPP and 3GPP2. OFDM facilitates higher data rates over a wireless medium, which is very exciting to wireless operators who are eager to deploy multimedia rich Internet content over a wireless medium with seamless access anywhere, anytime. This course describes key OFDM concepts and terminology. It explains the challenges of radio propagation and describes how OFDM overcomes these challenges to offer high data rates in a spectrally efficient manner, and steps through the key OFDM operations in an end-to-end transmission. Intended Audience This is a technical course, primarily intended for those in system design, system integration and test, systems engineering, network engineering, operations, and support. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Walk through the evolution of radio technologies • Describe the evolution and applications of OFDM • List the key attributes of OFDM and understand the frequency

domain orthogonality • Define various terms used in OFDM-based systems • Describe the challenges of radio propagation and how OFDM

overcome these challenges • Describe the key operation of cyclic prefix, FFT and IFFT • List the basic transmitter and receiver components in an OFDM

system • Step through the typical operations of an end-to-end data

transmission in an OFDM-based system

Knowledge Knuggets 1. Introduction

1.1. Evolution of radio technologies 1.2. Concepts of FDMA, TDMA, CDMA 1.3. Need for OFDM for high data rates

2. Principles of OFDM 2.1. Key attributes of OFDM 2.2. Frequency domain orthogonality 2.3. Time and frequency domain views

3. OFDM Basics 3.1. Carrier and subcarrier 3.2. Modulation and OFDM symbol 3.3. Subcarrier spacing 3.4. Guard period and cyclic prefix

4. Radio Propagation 4.1. Multipath and doppler shift 4.2. Inter Symbol Interference (ISI) 4.3. Guard Time 4.4. Inter Carrier Interference (ICI) 4.5. Cyclic prefix and pilots

5. Fourier Transform 5.1. Motivation for using Fourier

Transforms in OFDM systems 5.2. Concept of Fourier Transform 5.3. Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) 5.4. Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) 5.5. Implementation

6. End-to-End Transmission

6.1. Transmitter and receiver components

6.2. OFDM operations 7. Summary

Put It All Together Assess the knowledge of the participant based on the objectives of the course

Page 46: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

43© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v2.0

Multiple Antenna Techniques eLearning | Average Duration: 3 Hours | Course Number: TRND104

Advanced multiple antenna technologies enable emerging 4G cellular technologies to achieve superior data rates over the air interface (e.g., in excess of 100 Mbps). While 4G networks utilize an efficient multiple access technique called Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access (OFDMA), OFDMA on its own cannot deliver the expected superior throughput in 4G systems. Multiple antenna techniques play a critical role in increasing spectral efficiency. This course provides fundamental knowledge of numerous multiple antenna techniques that will be an integral part of emerging radio access standards. The antenna basics are explained, along with typical antenna configurations in commercial cellular deployments. Major antenna techniques are covered in the course, providing a strong foundation for advanced antenna technologies. Intended Audience This course is intended for those seeking a fundamental understanding of how various multiple antenna techniques work. This includes those in a design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering, network engineering, or verification role. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Outline key benefits and challenges of multiple antenna techniques • Provide examples of various types of multiple antenna techniques • Explain transmit and receive diversity techniques such as Space

Time Coding (STC) and antenna grouping • Contrast a switched-beam system with an adaptive beamforming

technique • Describe MIMO spatial multiplexing techniques • Discuss the implementation of SDMA • Give examples of the multiple antenna techniques defined in

emerging 4G cellular networks

Suggested Prerequisites • Overview of 3G Wireless Networks (eLearning)

Complementary Courses

• Overview of OFDM (eLearning)

Knowledge Knuggets 1. Introduction to Antenna Techniques

1.1. Antenna basics: Transmit and receive operation, antenna parameters, and antenna gain characteristics

1.2. Motivation for advanced antenna techniques

1.3. Example of antenna configurations: Omni and sectorized systems, 1 transmit and 1 receive antenna, 1 transmit and 2 receive antennas with space and polarization diversity

1.4. Summary of multiple antenna techniques, including advantages and challenges

2. Transmit and Receive Diversity Techniques 2.1. Basic techniques (space, time, and

frequency) 2.2. Advanced transmit diversity

techniques including STC, frequency/space, and antenna grouping/selection

2.3. Receive diversity 3. Beamforming Techniques

3.1. Construction of a beam 3.2. Transmit and receive beamforming 3.3. Switched-beam system 3.4. Adaptive beamforming system 3.5. Benefits and challenges of

beamforming

4. MIMO - Spatial Multiplexing

4.1. Basics of spatial multiplexing 4.2. Horizontal and vertical encoding,

single-code word and multi-code word

4.3. MIMO transmitter and receiver examples

4.4. Closed-loop MIMO (MIMO + precoding)

4.5. Collaborative spatial multiplexing 4.6. Benefits and challenges of MIMO-

SM

5. Summary

Put It All Together Assess the knowledge of the participant based on the objectives of the course

Page 47: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

44 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v2.0

Wi-Fi Overview eLearning | Average Duration: 3 hours | FUND106

Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) is becoming as ubiquitous as microwaves in enterprises, home offices and hotspots. This eLearning course offers a quick and concise overview of the Wi-Fi “network” and architecture. It begins with an overview of the current landscape of wireless networks, describing where Wi-Fi fits. The Wi-Fi network architecture and its components are introduced to provide an end-to-end view of the Wi-Fi network along with various applications of the technology, different flavors of Wi-Fi technologies and the landscape of Wi-Fi related technologies. The end-to-end view of a Wi-Fi connection setup and traffic flow is also explored. Intended Audience This course is an overview of Wi-Fi and designed for a broad audience, including customer support, operations, sales/marketing, product and project management and those in engineering who want a broad overview of Wi-Fi. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Describe Wi-Fi’s place in the landscape of wireless networks • Sketch the Wi-Fi “network” architecture and its interfaces • List key applications on Wi-Fi such as local area wireless

connectivity, VPN, VoIP, and FMC • List and define various 802.11 based air interface Wi-Fi

technologies • Sketch how Wi-Fi fits into existing enterprise networks • Identify the options for Wi-Fi deployment

Suggested Prerequisites

• Welcome to IP Networking (eLearning)

Knowledge Knuggets 1. Motivation and Overview

1.1. History of Wi-Fi and 802.11 1.2. Current state of wireless networks 1.3. Drivers for Wi-Fi networks

2. Wi-Fi Architecture 2.1. Wi-Fi “Network” architecture and

topology 2.2. Deployment scenarios (enterprise,

hotspot, home office) 3. Wi-Fi Technology Overview and

standards 3.1. Technology overview 3.2. Family of 802.11 and evolution from

802.11b to 802.11n 3.3. Overview of 802.11i, 802.11e and

802.11s 4. End to End Connection Setup

4.1. Walk through of connection setup 4.2. End-to-end flow

5. Wi-Fi Applications 5.1. Internet access 5.2. Enterprise/VPN access 5.3. Voice over Wi-Fi

6. Security over Wi-Fi 6.1. Security and authentication 6.2. WEP and AES 6.3. Application layer security

7. Wi-Fi Deployment Scenarios 7.1. Coverage and capacity 7.2. Unlicensed bands

Put It All Together

Assess the knowledge of the participant based on the objectives of the course

Page 48: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

45© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

Wi-Fi Technical Overview Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: TRND204

The enormous popularity of Wi-Fi has led to increasing demands for enhancing the data rate and other features in these wireless networks. Wi-Fi networks have rivaled cellular networks in terms of growth and popularity. There is much debate in the industry whether Wi-Fi competes with or complements 3G/4G networks. Wi-Fi technology is based on evolving 802.11 set of standards. This course covers the landscape of Wi-Fi standards, details of air Interface, network operations and deployment strategies. The course also deals with all major aspects of Wi-Fi including the possible interaction with cellular networks and future trends from a technology and application perspective. Intended Audience This course is intended for individuals looking to gain an understanding of Wi-Fi and its evolutions from the technical and usage perspectives. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Understand the link between Wi-Fi and IEEE 802.11 standards • List the RF bands relevant for Wi-Fi • Explain the different deployment scenarios for Wi-Fi • Describe the underlying technologies of Wi-Fi such as OFDM and

MIMO • Understand the basics of the MAC in Wi-Fi and also be able to

explain features such as frame aggregation, block ACK, TXOP, RIFS and the reverse direction protocol

• Explain the security features and protection mechanisms relevant for Wi-Fi deployments

• Understand how Wi-Fi networks are gearing up for working with cellular networks

• Explain the future technology and application trends in Wi-Fi

Suggested Prerequisites • Overview of OFDM (eLearning)

Course Outline 1. Introduction

1.1. Evolution of Wi-Fi and IEEE 802.11 standards

1.2. Types of Wi-Fi networks 1.3. Typical deployments 1.4. Future trends in Wi-Fi

2. Wi-Fi (802.11n) Air Interface 2.1. Physical layer evolution 2.2. Use of OFDM in Wi-Fi 2.3. Wi-Fi channels and bandwidths 2.4. Multiple antenna techniques in Wi-Fi 2.5. MAC principles in Wi-Fi 2.6. Advanced MAC features

3. Wi-Fi Security 3.1. Security requirements in Wi-Fi 3.2. Evolution of security in Wi-Fi 3.3. WPA and WPA2 3.4. Wireless intrusion threats 3.5. Wireless protected setup

4. Wi-Fi QoS 4.1. QoS features in Wi-Fi 4.2. WMM certification 4.3. Voice over Wi-Fi

5. Wi-Fi Network Operations 5.1. Beacons and their role 5.2. Scanning and network discovery 5.3. Power save mechanisms

6. Wi-Fi Deployment

6.1. Hotspot deployments 6.2. Enterprise deployments 6.3. Wi-Fi /cellular integration 6.4. Wi-Fi offloading for data and/or

voice 6.5. Wi-Fi Passpoint

Certification/Hotspot 2.0 7. 802.11 Extensions

7.1. Roaming/fast BSS transition – 802.11r

7.2. Radio resource management – 802.11k

7.3. Wi-Fi network management – 802.11v

7.4. Management frame protection – 802.11w

7.5. External networks – 802.11u 8. Future of Wi-Fi Technologies

8.1. 802.11ac and its features – band of operation, peak data rates, MU-MIMO operation, usage scenarios

8.2. 802.11ad and its features – band of operations, bandwidth, peak data rates, beamforming, and usage scenarios

Page 49: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

46 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

Page 50: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

47© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

About the CurriculumAward Solutions’ IP Convergence & IMS curriculum focuses on advanced technologies by providing a suite of courses to help prepare individuals for designing, deploying and optimizing tomorrow’s networks. Our courses provide end-to-end coverage of the technologies and explain how they are deployed in different wireless networks. It becomes useful for those who need to understand how to deploy and sell new services over the Internet.

Self-paced eLearning CoursesWelcome to IP NetworkingIP Convergence OverviewOverview of MPLSOverview of IMSVoice and Video over IP (VoIP) OverviewIP Quality of Service (QoS)Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)Ethernet Backhaul OverviewIP BasicsIP RoutingQoS in IP NetworksTCP and Transport Layer ProtocolsEthernet BasicsEthernet VLANsEthernet BridgingInterconnecting IP NetworksWelcome to IPv6

Instructor Led CoursesIP Convergence EssentialsEthernet Backhaul EssentialsExploring IPv6Exploring MPLSExploring IMS (R8)*Exploring SIP, VoIP and IP Convergence with IMS *NEWExploring Ethernet BackhaulVoice and Video over IP Protocols and Technologies

One of the key changes in communication networks is an evolution toward All-IP-based core networks. In these networks, both voice and data services areprovidedbyoneconsolidatednetwork.Operatorswillbeabletoprovidevoice,videoanddataserviceswithasingleunifiedcorenetwork.

TherearemanybenefitstoconvergedIPnetworks.Foroperators,theseintegratednetworksoffersavingsinoperatingcosts.Theyalsoenableoperatorsto offer integrated multimedia services combining voice and data services. As every communication network moves to IP-based networks, seamless mobility can be achieved by moving to All-IP-based networks.

IP Convergence & IMS

Exploring IMS (R8) Instructor Led Course

Instructor Led Courses (continued)Exploring IP Routing and Ethernet BridgingEthernet Backhaul Planning*SIP and Diameter for IMS/VoLTE *NEW*Exploring Cloud Computing Service Models *NEW*Exploring Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS) *NEW*Exploring the Service Oriented Architecture (SOA) *NEW

Page 51: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

48 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v3.0

Welcome to IP Networking eLearning | Average Duration: 3 hours | Course Number: IPC_103

As the wireless industry transitions to 3G and 4G wireless networks supporting higher rate packet data services, a solid understanding of IP networking is essential. IP is to data transfer as a dial tone is to a wireline telephone. A fundamental knowledge of IPv4 and IPv6 networking along with use of VLANs is a must for all wireless professionals. Starting with an introduction to IP networking services such as the web, email and VPN to illustrate the value and ubiquity of IP networks, the course then describes the IP network architecture, the functions provided by various components and the role of key protocols. This course provides an introduction to IPv6 features, its interworking with IPv4, and techniques to migrate to IPv6 and concludes with a discussion of how GPRS/UMTS/LTE and 1x/1xEV networks take advantage of IP networks when providing mobile web access. Intended Audience This course is intended for those seeking an introduction to IP Networking and how it is used in wireless networks. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• List the applications that use IP networks • Sketch the Internet architecture • Distinguish between Internet, intranet, extranet and IP networks • List the key characteristics of IP networks and different types of IP

addresses • Identify the limitations of IPv4, and key features and benefits of IPv6 • Name the key protocols used in IP networks • Explain how IP packets are routed from point A to point B • Describe security in IP networks • Describe the use of IP networking in 3G/4G wireless networks

Complementary Courses

• Wireless Internet - From IP to EDGE & UMTS/HSPA+ (Instructor Led)

Knowledge Knuggets 1. Applications in IP Networks

1.1. Email 1.2. Web browsing 1.3. IP telephony 1.4. Internet, Intranet, Extranet 1.5. VPN 1.6. Value of using IP

2. IP Network Architecture 2.1. Architecture of the Internet 2.2. WANs, MANs, LANs and VLANs 2.3. Functions of IP router 2.4. IP protocol layers

3. Key Characteristics of IP 3.1. IP addressing 3.2. Different versions of IP 3.3. Limitations of IPv4 3.4. Key features and benefits of IPv6 3.5. Migrating from IPv4 to IPv6

4. IP Networking Protocols and Their Roles 4.1. DHCP, DNS, ARP, PPP 4.2. RIP, OSPF, BGP 4.3. Domain Name System (DNS) 4.4. IP forwarding 4.5. TCP and UDP

5. Internet Security

5.1. Security threats 5.2. Key security technologies: IPSec,

SSL 5.3. Examples of applications

6. Wireless IP Networks 6.1. IP networks with mobile wireless

access 6.2. Architecture of 1x and

GPRS/UMTS/LTE 6.3. End-to-end scenario

7. Summary

Put It All Together Assess the knowledge of the participant based on the objectives of the course

Page 52: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

49© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v2.0

IP Convergence Overview eLearning | Average Duration: 4 hours | Course Number: IPC_104

As wireless and wireline networks mature, data usage increases, and network infrastructure and services become more IP-centric, more personnel will be responsible for managing and working with IP-centric networks. A solid understanding of IP and data communications will be essential for personnel at all levels to be effective in a data-oriented environment. This course provides the background and concepts to understand the motivations of networks converging toward IP. It discusses the challenges of transport of media (voice and video) using IP (VoIP) as the transport service in telecommunication networks. It presents the unique flavor of this challenge from the perspective of the three basic types of network for the telecommunications world – access networks, core networks, and services network. Intended Audience This course is intended for those seeking a high level understanding of the convergence toward IP-centric networks. This includes those in sales, marketing, project management, technical management, and executive management. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• List the key motivations for voice and video over IP • Define IP convergence • Describe the use of IP as transport in access networks • Discuss the use of IP as transport in core networks and the

associated major technologies • Outline the use of IP as transport in services networks and the

associated major technologies • Explain the possible evolution paths of networks today

Knowledge Knuggets 1. State of the Industry

1.1. Defining IP convergence 1.2. Motivations for convergence

1.2.1. Quad play 1.2.2. OPEX 1.2.3. Other converged services

1.3. What are voice and video over IP? 1.4. Where is the industry going? 1.5. Markets and regulatory environment 1.6. Discontinuities? 1.7. Common approaches in networks

2. IP Convergence in Access Networks 2.1. Scope of the convergence 2.2. Residential – cable, DSL, FTTH 2.3. Enterprise – PBX, host-based 2.4. Wireless – UMTS, 1xEV-DO, WiMAX 2.5. Challenges and scenarios

3. IP Convergence in Core Networks 3.1. The carrier network challenge 3.2. QoS 3.3. RTP and RTCP 3.4. PSTN and SS7 interworking

4. IP Convergence in Services Networks 4.1. The service network challenge 4.2. The service network competitors

4.2.1. IMS/MMD 4.2.2. P2P (Skype, MS LCS, etc.)

4.3. Supporting

technologies/protocols 4.3.1. SIP 4.3.2. H.323 4.3.3. Megaco/H.248

4.4. Deployment and challenges 5. Looking Ahead

5.1. Time frames 5.2. Looking forward

6. Summary

Put It All Together Exercise 1

Page 53: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

50 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v3.0

Overview of MPLS eLearning | Average Duration: 3.5 hours | Course Number: IPC_106

As the services and applications of the Internet continue to expand, the Internet backbone must evolve to support them. The key areas of emphasis are routing, QoS, addressing, efficiency and security. Multi Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) is designed to make the Internet fast, scalable and manageable, and capable of carrying heavy traffic, supporting QoS and new routing architectures. This course presents a technical overview of MPLS including a detailed discussion on the architecture of MPLS, the components of the MPLS network and the supporting protocols required for MPLS. Operational issues of MPLS and issues related to interworking MPLS with ATM are also explored. The course ends with a discussion of G-MPLS, which is the evolution of MPLS. Intended Audience This course is intended for anyone seeking an overview of MPLS, its features and capabilities. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Describe the motivation behind MPLS • State the role of MPLS in the convergence of networks • List key applications of MPLS • Compare and contrast the routing techniques of ATM and MPLS • Sketch the architecture of MPLS • Describe the important components and operations of MPLS • Describe how MPLS is used to set up layer 3 and layer 2 VPNs • Explain the role of MPLS in traffic engineering • Identify the next steps for MPLS including G-MPLS

Knowledge Knuggets 1. Prologue

1.1. Introduction to MPLS 1.2. Motivation for MPLS 1.3. IP forwarding techniques 1.4. MPLS forwarding techniques

2. Current state of IP networks 2.1. Limitations of IP networks 2.2. IP over ATM solutions

3. Why MPLS? 3.1. Advantages of MPLS 3.2. New applications

4. MPLS Networks 4.1. MPLS domain 4.2. Label edge router 4.3. Label switch router

5. MPLS Terminology 5.1. Label Switched Paths (LSP) 5.2. Forward Equivalence Class (FEC) 5.3. Structure of a label

6. Packet Forwarding Along LSPs 6.1. Label Forwarding Information Base

(LFIB) 6.2. Packet forwarding along LSPs 6.3. Label stacking

7. LSP Setup Process 7.1. Hop-by-hop routed LSPs 7.2. Explicit routed LSPs

8. MPLS Protocols

8.1. New protocols 8.2. Example of protocol use

9. MPLS and Virtual Private Networks 9.1. VPNs support in MPLS 9.2. Layer 3 and Layer 2 VPNs

establishment in MPLS 9.3. Label stacking and VPNs 9.4. MPLS based L2 VPN solutions

10. MPLS and Traffic Engineering 10.1. Introduction to traffic engineering 10.2. MPLS traffic engineering

procedures 11. Deployment

11.1. Current deployments 11.2. Next steps

12. Evolution of MPLS 12.1. New applications 12.2. Generalized MPLS (G-MPLS)

13. Summary

Put It All Together Assess the knowledge of the participant based on the objectives of the course

Page 54: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

51© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v3.0

Overview of IMS eLearning | Average Duration: 2.5 hours | Course Number: IPC_107

The Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) is a significant core network evolution that uses common Internet-based protocols to provide global, access-independent and standard-based IP connectivity and service control. The IMS architecture is a key enabler of various types of multimedia services to end-users. IMS helps provide a network that fulfills the promise of all-IP networks, allowing a combination of real-time and non- real-time services to be delivered to a single device. IMS is access network independent and, hence, promotes interoperability between wireline, cellular, WLAN, CATV, FTTH and other types of access networks. This course explores the various concepts used in the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) including architecture, network components and interfaces. Please note that this course does not cover any specific access technology. Intended Audience This course is intended for those seeking a high level understanding of the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS). This includes those in sales and marketing, product planning, product management, design, integration, verification and deployment. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• List the driving forces, requirements and goals of the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS)

• Identify the building blocks used to construct the IMS • Describe the functions of the IMS architecture that support

multimedia functions • Explain the roles of SIP, MEGACO, DIAMETER, and the enabling

technologies used in the architecture • Describe how functions such as mobility, and call processing are

carried out in the new architecture • Explain end-to-end service establishment flows in the IMS

architecture • Describe scenarios that illustrate interworking with the PSTN

Suggested Prerequisites • IP Convergence Overview (eLearning)

Knowledge Knuggets 1. Setting the Stage

1.1. Trends for telephony services 1.2. Evolution of mobile networks 1.3. Define IMS 1.4. Benefits and challenges of IMS 1.5. IMS service examples

2. IMS Architecture 2.1. Origin of IMS 2.2. Architecture reference models 2.3. Components and functions

3. Signaling and Transport 3.1. IMS reference points 3.2. Role of SIP, DIAMETER and

H.248/Megaco 3.3. Basics of voice transmission 3.4. QoS management in IMS 3.5. RTP and RTCP

4. IMS Scenarios 4.1. IMS registration 4.2. IMS session setup 4.3. Role of application servers 4.4. Examples

5. Interworking

5.1. Interoperability between PSTN and IMS

5.2. Compare PSTN call establishment with IMS to IMS call

5.3. Establishing a call with the PSTN 5.4. Messages required for a call to

the PSTN 6. Summary

Put It All Together Assess the knowledge of the participant based on the objectives of the course

Page 55: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

52 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v3.0

Voice and Video over IP (VoIP) Overview eLearning | Average Duration: 3 hours | Course Number: IPC_108

Quad Play (Voice, Video, Data, and Wireless) is the name for the latest evolution in the communications industry. Since more people will be responsible for operating, maintaining and working with IP-centric networks, this course provides the essential knowledge on Voice and Video services using IP (VVoIP) in modern communications networks. We begin the course with a look at the motivation for change and the network architectures of today and tomorrow. We move on to provide an end-to-end view of the call setups that establish VVoIP networks, followed by a look at IPTV, and a high-level examination of the underlying protocols and technologies used in the devices, the edge (access) networks, and the core networks that provide appropriate Quality of Service (QoS). The course offers exercises designed to reinforce key objectives and make participant comfortable with the concepts. Intended Audience This course is intended for those seeking a high-level but comprehensive understanding of VVoIP in both its voice and video renditions. The intended audience includes those in sales, marketing, product and strategic planning, product documentation, product management, system design and integration, and application verification and deployments. The course is also good preparation for more advanced courses in the underlying subjects. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Describe the motivation behind VVoIP • Provide an overview of VVoIP • Explain how VVoIP calls are set up • Introduce IPTV • Describe how Quality of Service (QoS) can be implemented • Illustrate video traffic operations • Explain the interworking of VVoIP networks with other types of

networks • Discuss VVoIP deployments

Knowledge Knuggets 1. Introduction

1.1. Motivation for VVoIP 1.2. Characteristics of VVoIP 1.3. Network architecture

1.3.1. Today Tomorrow 1.3.2. PSTN Managed packets

1.4. Key requirements 1.5. Challenges of VVoIP and

convergence 2. Setting up a Call

2.1. Architecture of a SIP network 2.2. Voice over IP call flow

2.2.1. Authentication 2.2.2. QoS negotiation 2.2.3. Monitoring traffic flow

2.3. Video over IP call flow 2.4. SIP and SDP basics 2.5. Comparison of SIP and H.323

3. IPTV 3.1. The changing TV service model 3.2. IPTV networks and protocols

4. QoS Requirements and Solutions 4.1. QoS challenges 4.2. Possible solutions

5. Traffic Operations

5.1. Device traffic operations 5.2. Media encoding 5.3. Media transport

6. Interworking with Other Networks 6.1. Architecture and media gateways 6.2. SIGTRAN and SCTP 6.3. End-to-end call set up with the

PSTN 7. Deployment Considerations

7.1. Dimensioning 7.2. Key performance indicators 7.3. Security

8. Summary

Put it all Together Assess the knowledge of the participant based on the objectives of the course

Page 56: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

53© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v2.0

IP Quality of Service (QoS) eLearning | Average Duration: 3 hours | Course Number: IPC_109

The Internet is coming to a new age where various applications have their own QoS requirements, and one size definitely does not fit all. This course introduces the concept of QoS and discusses the current limitations within the Internet. The new services requirements driving QoS in the Internet are presented. The two basic techniques used for QoS - Integrated Services and Differentiated Services - are presented. The discussion includes the benefits and limitations of the Integrated Services and the Differentiated Services approaches to QoS. While IntServ and DiffServ are the approaches, service providers need an infrastructure to deploy QoS-based applications rapidly. This course describes the policy-based QoS architecture which supports the infrastructure for delivering QoS based applications. Finally, emerging trends in IP QoS are introduced. Intended Audience This course is intended for anyone seeking an overview of the IP Quality of Service architectures in the Internet. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Determine the limitations of the best effort approach to QoS • Describe the need for QoS with respect to new applications • Explain how QoS requirements are communicated • Define policy-based architecture • Explain the benefits and limitations of the Integrated Services

approach to QoS • Explain the benefits and limitations of the Differentiated Services

approach to QoS • Describe the protocols that are used for each of the QoS

approaches • Identify emerging trends in IP QoS

Knowledge Knuggets 1. Motivation for Quality of Service (QoS)

1.1. Definition of Quality of Service 1.2. Service examples 1.3. QoS parameters

2. QoS in today’s Internet 2.1. Current QoS mechanisms 2.2. Limitations of the current QoS

mechanisms 3. QoS Requirements

3.1. Requirements of QoS on the Internet 3.2. Service Level Agreements (SLAs) 3.3. Challenges for deploying IP QoS 3.4. Policy based QoS architecture

4. QoS Models 4.1. Application approach vs. aggregated

approach 4.2. Introduction to IP QoS models

5. Integrated Services Approach (IntServ) 5.1. Integrated Service approach 5.2. Limitations of the Integrated Services

approach 5.3. ReSerVation Protocol (RSVP)

6. Differentiated Services Approach (DiffServ) 6.1. Differentiated services approach 6.2. DiffServ protocol 6.3. DiffServ implementation 6.4. Traffic management functions 6.5. Issues with DiffServ

7. Emerging Trends in QoS

7.1. Hybrid architectures 7.2. Automated QoS management 7.3. Bandwidth brokers

8. Summary

Put It All Together Assess the knowledge of the participant based on the objectives of the course

Page 57: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

54 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v3.0

Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) eLearning | Average Duration: 2 hours | Course Number: IPC_110

The Internet has become the single network that provides universal connectivity around the world. One of the new and exciting uses of the Internet is to provide voice and multimedia services. A protocol must exist to establish these voice and multimedia calls. This course discusses the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP). SIP was developed by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) to establish voice and multimedia calls through the Internet. SIP is designed to establish voice calls as well as any connection between two or more parties. This connection can vary from simple Instant Messaging to more complex multimedia sessions. The messaging and architecture of SIP are explained in detail including the key contents of the messages and the key components of the architecture. The concepts of SIP are solidified with the presentation of a series of multimedia service establishment examples. Intended Audience This course is intended for anyone seeking an overview of SIP, its features and capabilities. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Explain the motivation behind a consolidated voice and data network

• Describe the challenges of a consolidated network • Define the term softswitch and its usage • Describe how SIP will be used to establish everything from voice

calls to multimedia sessions • Identify components in the SIP architecture and their function in the

converged network • State the use and flexibility of the Session Description Protocol • Explain how SIP is being extended to provide additional capabilities

Suggested Prerequisites

• Welcome to IP Networking (eLearning)

Knowledge Knuggets 1. Motivation for Voice over IP networks

1.1. Motivation for consolidating voice and data

1.2. Benefits of a consolidated network 1.3. Challenges of a consolidated

network 2. Key Features of SIP

2.1. Introduction to SIP 2.2. Key characteristics and features of

SIP 3. SIP Messaging

3.1. Basic session establishment 3.2. Session Description Protocol 3.3. Addressing 3.4. Registration

4. SIP Architecture 4.1. Functions and capabilities of SIP

servers 4.2. Role of User Agent 4.3. Proxy and redirect servers 4.4. Function of a softswitch

5. Examples of session establishment 5.1. Establishment of a video call via LAN 5.2. Establishment of a voice call via ITSP

6. SIP Challenge 6.1. Extensions 6.2. Firewall traversal

7. Looking Ahead

7.1. Future of SIP 8. Summary

Put It All Together Assess the knowledge of the participant based on the objectives of the course

Page 58: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

55© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

Ethernet Backhaul Overview eLearning | Average Duration: 3 hours | Course Number: IPC_122

Emerging 3G and 4G networks reflect two key fundamental changes in wireless networks. The first change is the trend toward an “all IP” network and the second change is a more efficient radio interface resulting in a huge growth in the volume of traffic supported by the air interface. Traditional backhaul using T1/E1 leased lines is no longer economical so new backhaul solutions are being deployed. This course describes the key issues leading to the need for new backhaul solutions and provides an overview of the various backhaul solutions and related technologies. It introduces the backhaul network architecture and reviews technologies such as ATM, DSL, Bonded T1/E1, DOCSIS, Microwave Radio, PON, Carrier Ethernet, MPLS/MPLS-TP and PBB-TE. A backhaul capacity planning and technology migration scenario is presented, and the course ends with an exercise to test the student’s comprehension of the topics covered. Intended Audience This course is suitable for those looking for a high level conceptual overview of IP/Ethernet backhaul networks and an introduction to associated technologies. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• List the requirements for 3G/4G backhaul • Describe the challenges for 3G/4G backhaul • Differentiate between the access and aggregation networks • Identify the networking options most likely deployed for Ethernet

Backhaul (EBH) • Discuss the role of various technologies in backhaul networks • Explain benefits of Carrier Ethernet and list various services

provided for backhaul • List the key issues related to migrating to an Ethernet-based

backhaul network • Identify tools and techniques used to seamlessly migrate to EBH • Compare different backhaul facilities and explain the pros and cons

of the available solutions • Explain where faults in the EBH network may occur, and how these

faults are detected and isolated • Identify the key challenges in sizing backhaul capacity links • Sketch possible migration path from a T1/E1 based backhaul

solution to tomorrow’s IP/Carrier Ethernet based backhaul solution

Knowledge Knuggets 1. The “Big Picture”

1.1. What is “Backhaul” 1.2. Motivation for EBH 1.3. Backhaul requirements 1.4. Backhaul challenges

2. Backhaul Options 2.1. SONET transport 2.2. Microwave transport 2.3. Ethernet transport 2.4. Other transport

3. Carrier Ethernet (CE) 3.1. What is it? 3.2. CE service types 3.3. CE connection granularity 3.4. Negotiating a CE service 3.5. EBH backhaul design

4. Key EBH Issues 4.1. Migration: Today’s BH to tomorrow’s

BH 4.2. Joint backhaul of 2G, 3G, and 4G

traffic 4.3. Emerging all-IP environment 4.4. Timing and synchronization 4.5. EBH operations and management

5. EBH Growing Pains 5.1. Market evolution 5.2. Bonding techniques 5.3. CE transport options 5.4. TDM-based to Ethernet-based

backhaul

6. Deploying and Operating an EBH

Network 6.1. Deployment testing (RFC2544;

Y.1731, CFM) 6.2. Fault detection and recovery 6.3. Performance monitoring

7. EBH Capacity Planning 7.1. Capacity planning process 7.2. Nature of data traffic 7.3. Forecasting subscriber mixes 7.4. Sizing EBH links

8. Summary

Putting it All Together Exercise to assess the knowledge of the participant based on the objectives of the course

Page 59: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

56 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

IP Basics eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: IPC_114

As the communications industry transitions to wireless and wireline converged networks to support voice, video, data and mobile services over IP, a solid understanding of IP and its role in networking is essential. IP is to data transfer as what a dial tone is to a wireline telephone. A fundamental knowledge of IPv4 and IPv6 networking along with use of VLANs is a must for all telecom professionals. A solid foundation in IP has become a basic job requirement in the carrier world. Starting with a brief history, the course provides a focused basic level introduction to the fundamentals of IP technology. It is a modular introductory course only on IP basics as part of the overall eLearning IP fundamentals curriculum. Intended Audience This course is intended for those seeking a basic level introduction to the Internet Protocol (IP). Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Describe the purpose and structure of an IP address • Describe network prefix • Explain the purpose of CIDR Prefix • Explain the purpose of Subnet Mask • Describe IP Subnets • Explain the IP header and its key fields • Describe broadcasting in IP networks • Describe multicasting in IP networks

Knowledge Knuggets 1. IP Address 2. IP Subnets 3. IP Header 4. Multicast and Broadcast

Page 60: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

57© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

IP Routing eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: IPC_113

As the communications industry transitions to wireless and wireline converged networks to support voice, video, data and mobile services over IP, a solid understanding of IP and its role in networking is essential. IP is to data transfer as a dial tone is to a wireline telephone. A fundamental knowledge of IPv4 and IPv6 networking along with use of routing is a must for all telecom professionals. A solid foundation in IP and routing has become a basic job requirement in the carrier world. Understanding of IP routing protocols is an important part of building this foundation. Starting with a basic definition, the course provides a focused base level introduction to the fundamentals of IP routing and associated protocols like OSPF, BGP, and VRRP. It is a modular introductory course only on IP routing as part of the overall eLearning IP fundamentals curriculum. Intended Audience This course is intended for those seeking a basic level introduction to IP routing and the common associated protocols. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Define the differences between IP routing and forwarding • Distinguish between Interior Gateway Protocols and Exterior

Gateway Protocols and give examples of each • Explain Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) and how it is used • List the main types of Link State Advertisements in OSPF • Describe Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) and how it is used • Show how route reflectors simplify network configuration and

reduce routing overhead • Explain how PING can be used to verify end-to-end connectivity in an

IP Network • Describe how Traceroute can be used to track down routing errors

in a network

Knowledge Knuggets 1. What is IP routing?

1.1. IP routing basics 1.2. Routing and forwarding 1.3. Routing protocols

2. Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) 2.1. OSPF basics 2.2. A closer look at OSPF

3. Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) 3.1. BGP basics 3.2. A closer look at BGP 3.3. Scaling BGP

4. Redundancy Protocols 4.1. Introduction 4.2. VRRP 4.3. GLBP

5. Debugging Tools and Utilities 5.1. PING 5.2. Traceroute

6. Summary

Page 61: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

58 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

QoS in IP Networks eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: IPC_115

As the communications industry transitions to wireless and wireline converged networks to support voice, video, data and mobile services over IP, a solid understanding of IP and its role in networking is essential. IP is to data transfer as what a dial tone is to a wireline telephone. A fundamental knowledge of IPv4 and IPv6 networking along with the use of IP for Quality of Service (QoS) is a must for all telecom professionals. A solid foundation in IP and QoS has become a basic job requirement in the carrier world. Various applications have their own QoS requirements in converged networks, and one size definitely does not fit all. This course introduces the concept of QoS. The two basic techniques used for QoS - Integrated Services and Differentiated Services - are presented. While IntServ and DiffServ are the approaches, service providers need an infrastructure to deploy QoS-based applications rapidly. This is a modular introductory course on IP QoS basics as part of the overall eLearning IP fundamentals curriculum. Intended Audience This course is intended for anyone seeking an overview of the IP Quality of Service architectures. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Explore the Motivations for QoS in an IP network • Describe the different QoS parameters • Define the QoS process and Service Level Agreements • Explain the Policy based QoS architecture • Differentiate the IP QoS models: IntServ and DiffServ • Explain in detail how the DiffServ model is implemented • Explain how QoS is achieved in the LTE network

Knowledge Knuggets 1. Motivation for Quality of Service

1.1. Definition of Quality of Service 1.2. QoS parameters 1.3. Service examples

2. QoS Requirements 2.1. Requirements of QoS 2.2. QoS process 2.3. Service Level Agreement (SLA) 2.4. Policy based QoS architecture

3. QoS Models 3.1. Introduction to IP QoS models 3.2. Integrated Services (IntServ) 3.3. Differentiated Services (DiffServ)

4. DiffServ 4.1. Differentiated services approach 4.2. DiffServ protocol 4.3. DSCP 4.4. Traffic enforcement functions 4.5. DiffServ support in Ethernet and

MPLS 4.6. QoS in LTE network

Page 62: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

59© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

TCP and Transport Layer Protocols eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: IPC_117

As the communications industry transitions to wireless and wireline converged networks to support voice, video, data and mobile services over IP, a solid understanding of IP and its role in networking is essential. IP is to data transfer as what a dial tone is to a wireline telephone. A fundamental knowledge of IPv4 and IPv6 networking along with use of IP based transport protocols is a must for all telecom professionals. A solid foundation in IP has become a basic job requirement in the carrier world. Understanding of TCP and other IP based transport layer protocols is an important part of building this foundation. Starting with a basic definition, the course provides a focused basic level introduction to the fundamentals of IP based transport layer protocols like TCP, UDP and SCTP. It is a modular introductory course only on IP basics as part of the overall eLearning IP fundamentals curriculum. Intended Audience This course is intended for those seeking a basic level introduction to the IP-based transport layer protocols - TCP, UDP and SCTP. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Explain the key transport layer functions and the concept of ports • Describe User Datagram Protocol (UDP) and Transmission Control

Protocol (TCP) • Explain how TCP provides reliable communication over IP and

achieves optimal transmission • Define the special requirements for carrying telecom signaling over

IP networks • List the key functions of Stream Control Transmission Protocol

(SCTP)

Knowledge Knuggets 1. Overview of the Transport Layer 2. User Datagram Protocol 3. Transmission Control Protocol 4. Stream Control Transport Protocol 5. Summary

Page 63: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

60 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

Ethernet Basics eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: IPC_119

As the communications industry transitions to wireless and wireline converged networks to support voice, video, data and mobile services over IP networks, a solid understanding of Ethernet and its role in networking is essential. Ethernet is native to IP and has been adopted in various forms by the communication industry. A solid foundation in IP and Ethernet has become a basic job requirement in the industry. Starting with a brief history, the course provides a focused basic level introduction to the fundamentals of Ethernet technology. It is a modular introductory course only on Ethernet basics as part of the overall eLearning IP fundamentals curriculum. Intended Audience This course is intended for those seeking a basic level introduction to Ethernet technology. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Define Ethernet • Summarize the key variations of the Ethernet family of standards • Discuss Ethernet addressing and Frame Structure • Discuss Ethernet services offered by Carriers

Knowledge Knuggets 1. Ethernet Defined 2. Ethernet Standards 3. Ethernet Addressing and Frame

Structure 4. Carrier Ethernet 5. Summary

Page 64: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

61© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

Ethernet VLANs eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: IPC_118

As the communications industry transitions to wireless and wireline converged networks to support voice, video, data and mobile services over IP networks, a solid understanding of Ethernet and its role in networking is essential. Ethernet is native to IP and has been adopted in various forms by the telecom industry as the Layer 1 and Layer 2 of choice. VLANs are used extensively in the end-to-end IP network and a solid foundation in IP and Ethernet has become a basic job requirement for the carrier world. Starting with a brief history, the course provides a focused basic level introduction to the fundamentals of Ethernet VLAN technology. It is a modular introductory course only on Ethernet VLAN basics as part of the overall eLearning IP fundamentals curriculum. The course includes a pre-test and a post-test. Intended Audience This course is intended for those seeking a basic level introduction to Ethernet Bridging. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Define Ethernet VLANs • Identify Ethernet VLAN applications and benefits • Summarize the key variations of the Ethernet family of standards to

support VLANs • Identify the key types of Ethernet VLANs • Describe VLAN Trunks and their purpose

Knowledge Knuggets 1. Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) 2. VLAN Application and Benefits 3. Default VLAN 4. Multiswitch VLANs: Trunks and

Tagging 5. Summary

Page 65: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

62 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

Ethernet Bridging eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: IPC_116

As the communications industry transitions to wireless and wireline converged networks to support voice, video, data and mobile services over IP networks, a solid understanding of Ethernet and its role in networking is essential. Ethernet is native to IP and has been adopted in various forms by the telecom industry as the Layer 1 and Layer 2 technology of choice. Ethernet bridging and associated capabilities are used extensively in the end-to-end IP network and a solid foundation in IP and Ethernet has become a basic job requirement in the carrier world. Starting with a brief history, the course provides a focused basic level introduction to the fundamentals of Ethernet Bridging as a key capability of Ethernet based nodes. It is a modular introductory course only on Ethernet Bridging basics as part of the overall eLearning IP fundamentals curriculum. Intended Audience This course is intended for those seeking a basic level introduction to Ethernet Bridging. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Introduce Ethernet Bridges and explain how they operate • Introduce Ethernet Switches and explain how they differ from

Ethernet Bridges • Discuss Spanning Tree Protocol and its variations • Introduce the concept of Multilayer Switching • Discuss the use of Link Aggregation Group in Ethernet networks

Knowledge Knuggets 1. Ethernet Bridge

1.1. Definition 1.2. History 1.3. Learning Bridge

2. Ethernet Switch 2.1. Definition 2.2. History 2.3. Ethernet Switching 2.4. Full Duplex operation

3. Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) 3.1. Function 3.2. Operation 3.3. Variants

4. Multilayer Switch (MLS) 4.1. Definition 4.2. Function

5. Link Aggregation Group 5.1. Definition 5.2. Uses

6. Summary

Page 66: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

63© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

Interconnecting in IP Networks eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: IPC_120

As the communications industry transitions to wireless and wireline converged networks to support voice, video, data and mobile services over IP networks, a solid understanding of IP and its role in inter-networking is essential. IP is to data transfer as a dial tone is to a wireline telephone. A fundamental knowledge of IPv4 and IPv6 networking along with their use for inter-networking is a must for all telecom professionals. A solid foundation in IP has become a basic job requirement in carrier networks. As the services and applications of wireless networks continue to expand, the backbone must evolve to support them. Multi Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) is designed to make the backbone fast, scalable and manageable, and capable of carrying heavy traffic, supporting QoS. This course presents a technical overview of MPLS including a discussion on the architecture of MPLS, the components of the MPLS network and the supporting protocols required for MPLS. It is a modular introductory course only on MPLS basics as part of the overall eLearning IP fundamentals curriculum. Intended Audience This course is intended for anyone seeking a basic level overview of the MPLS and IP interconnecting architectures. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Describe the motivation behind MPLS • State the role of MPLS in the convergence of networks • List key applications of MPLS • Sketch the architecture of MPLS • Describe the important components and operations of MPLS • Describe how MPLS is used to set up layer 3 and layer 2 VPNs

Knowledge Knuggets 1. Why MPLS?

1.1. Advantages of MPLS 1.2. New applications

2. MPLS Networks 2.1. MPLS domain 2.2. Label edge router 2.3. Label switch router

3. MPLS Terminology 3.1. Label Switched Paths (LSP) 3.2. Forward Equivalence Class (FEC) 3.3. Structure of a label

4. Packet Forwarding Along LSPs 4.1. Label Forwarding Information Base

(LFIB) 4.2. Packet forwarding along LSPs 4.3. Label stacking

5. MPLS and Virtual Private Networks 5.1. VPNs support in MPLS 5.2. Layer 3 and Layer 2 VPNs

establishment in MPLS 5.3. Label stacking and VPNs 5.4. MPLS based L2 VPN solutions

Page 67: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

64 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

Welcome to IPv6 eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour

As the communications industry transitions to wireless, wireline converged networks to support voice, video, data and mobile services over IP networks, a solid understanding of IP and its role in networking is essential. IP is to data transfer as a dial tone is to a wireline telephone. A fundamental knowledge of IPv4 and IPv6 networking along with use of IP for QoS is a must for all telecom professionals. IPv6 was defined in 1998 but saw little adoption for over a decade. With continued IPv4 address depletion and the migration to wireless VoIP in LTE networks, the time for widespread adoption has finally arrived. This course begins with a look at the motivation for migrating to IPv6 and some of the benefits. The IPv6 header and addressing concepts are explained next. The 128 bit address necessitates changes to many of the supporting protocols for IP and those are discussed next. The course concludes with a look at the various approaches to migrating from IPv4 to IPv6 and how these are deployed in LTE networks.

Intended Audience This course is intended for technical personnel with a grounding in IPv4 networks who are seeking an technical overview of IPv6 and related protocols. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Describe why the migration to IPv6 is finally happening • List the key benefits of IPv6 • Explain key fields in the IPv6 header • Discuss how IPv6 addresses are formatted and how they are

assigned • Explain how the basic IP supporting protocols are enhanced to

support IPV6 • Describe how automatic routing for IPv6 networks is enabled by

BGP and OSPF • Discuss how dual stack devices help ease the transition from IPv4

to IPv6 • Understand the differences between configured and automatic

tunnels for IPv6 transition • Describe how LTE networks use IPv6 and why it is necessary

Knowledge Knuggets 1. Motivation and Benefits

1.1. IPv4 address depletion 1.2. Limitations of NAT 1.3. Benefits of IPv6

2. IPv6 Header and Addresses 2.1. Header format 2.2. Address format 2.3. Address notation 2.4. Types of addresses 2.5. Address assignment

3. Supporting Protocols 3.1. ICMP 3.2. DNS 3.3. DHCP 3.4. OSPF 3.5. BGP

4. Transition to IPv6 4.1. The transition problem 4.2. Dual stack 4.3. Configured tunneling 4.4. Automatic tunneling 4.5. IPv6 in LTE

Page 68: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

65© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

IP Convergence Essentials Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day | Course Number: IPC_101

As wireless and wireline networks mature, data usage increases, and network infrastructure and services become more IP-centric, more personnel will be responsible for managing and working with IP-centric networks. A solid understanding of IP and data communications will be essential for personnel at all levels to be effective in a data-oriented environment. This course provides the background and concepts to understand the motivations of networks converging towards IP. It discusses the challenges of transport of media (voice and video) using IP (VoIP) as the transport service in telecommunication networks. It presents the unique flavor of this challenge from the perspective of the three basic types of network for the telecommunications world: Access networks, core networks, and services networks. Intended Audience This course is intended for those seeking a high level understanding of the convergence toward IP-centric networks. This includes those in sales, marketing, project management, technical management, and executive management. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• List the key motivations for voice and video over IP • Define IP convergence • Describe the use of IP as transport in access networks • Discuss the use of IP as transport in core networks and the

associated major technologies • Outline the use of IP as transport in services networks and the

associated major technologies • Explain the possible evolution paths of networks today

Suggested Prerequisites

• Welcome to IP Networking (eLearning)

Course Outline 1. Introduction to IP Convergence

1.1. Defining IP convergence 1.2. Motivations for convergence

1.2.1. Quad play 1.2.2. OPEX 1.2.3. Other converged services

1.3. What are voice and video over IP? 1.4. Where is the industry going? 1.5. Markets and regulatory environment 1.6. Discontinuities? 1.7. Common approaches in networks

2. IP and VoIP Fundamentals 2.1. Circuit-Switching vs Packet-Switching 2.2. IP characterisitics 2.3. VoIP 2.4. QoS

3. Access Networks 3.1. Scope of the convergence 3.2. Residential – cable, DSL and FTTH 3.3. Enterprise – PBX and host-based 3.4. Wireless – UMTS, 1xEV-DO, LTE and

WiMAX 3.5. Challenges and scenarios

4. Core Networks 4.1. The carrier network challenge 4.2. QoS 4.3. IPv4 4.4. IPv6 4.5. IP in ATM vs MPLS

5. Service Network Convergence

5.1. The service network challenge 5.2. NGN 5.3. IMS 5.4. IPTV 5.5. IPTN in NGN with IMS 5.6. Deployment and challenges

6. Looking Ahead 6.1. Timeframes 6.2. Carrier ethernet 6.3. 4G wireless 6.4. Summary

Page 69: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

66 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.2

Ethernet Backhaul Essentials Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day | Course Number: IPC_102

Executives, directors, program and project managers as well as sales and marketing professionals involved in 3G and 4G networks can benefit from a good understanding of the terminology as well as concepts and technologies for IP/Ethernet backhaul. Two fundamental changes result from 3G and 4G networks having a significant impact on backhaul: Trend toward an “all IP” network and the huge growth in the traffic over the air interface. With T1/E1 leased lines, backhaul is no longer economical, so new backhaul solutions are being deployed. This course provides an overview of the various backhaul solutions and related technologies, and describes the backhaul network architecture along with reviewing technologies. A backhaul technology migration scenario is presented, and the course ends with discussion of the impact of the new IP backhaul. Intended Audience This course is designed for executives, directors, supervisors, program/project managers as well as sales and marketing professionals involved in the IP/Ethernet backhaul solutions. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• List the requirements for 3G/4G backhaul • Describe the challenges for 3G/4G backhaul • Sketch the 3G/4G IP backhaul deployment architecture • Differentiate between the access and aggregation networks • Discuss the role of various technologies in backhaul networks • Explain benefits of IP/MPLS and list various services provided for

backhaul • Explain benefits of carrier Ethernet and list various services

provided for backhaul • Differentiate between L2 and L3 EBH solutions • Show details of packet encapsulations between tower and MTSO • Explain how subnets, VLANs, static routes, VRRP, BFD, MPLS all

work together to create a complete and reliable solution • Connect the LTE layer with the EBH layer

Course Outline 1. LTE and EBH Motivation

1.1. Motivation 1.2. End-to-end network architecture 1.3. Possible EBH solutions

2. L2 Backhaul Solution 2.1. L2 backhaul architecture 2.2. VLANs, subnets 2.3. Static routes 2.4. Use of MPLS in backhaul 2.5. 2G, 3G and LTE paths

3. L3 Backhaul Solution 3.1. L3 backhaul architecture 3.2. VLANs, subnets 3.3. Static routes 3.4. Use of OSPF in backhaul 3.5. 2G, 3G and LTE paths

4. IP/MPLS Technology 4.1. Key benefits 4.2. MPLS AToM/Pseudowire 4.3. VPWS/VPLS/H-VPLS 4.4. QoS support 4.5. Application in backhaul

5. Metro/Carrier Ethernet Technology and Operations 5.1. Key benefits 5.2. Circuit over Ethernet 5.3. Synchronization over Ethernet

5.4. QoS support 5.5. Application in backhaul

6. LTE Operations Essentials 6.1. End-to-end session setup 6.2. Signaling between eNodeB, MME

and S-GW 7. eNodeB to MTSO Packet-Flow

Exercise 7.1. Sketch packet headers and

encapsulations for L2 solution 7.2. Sketch packet headers and

encapsulations for L3 solutions 8. eNodeB to MTSO Redundancy

Exercise 8.1. Failure detection 8.2. Routing due to failures 8.3. Packet forwarding to alternate

paths

Page 70: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

67© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.5

Exploring IPv6 Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day | Course Number: IPC_202

The roots of the current Internet stretch back over twenty years to its beginnings in academic institutions. The fact that it has been able to adapt and scale to today’s global network is a testament to the solid design principles used in its creation. However, as the number of Internet nodes continues to grow and new demands are placed on it by evolving cellular wireless networks, the current IPv4-NAT architecture no longer suffices and we must consider a transition to an updated protocol. This course explores the IPv6 protocol, which brings not only a vast address space to address millions of billions of network nodes but also a bag of new tricks. Streamlined and simplified, IPv6 incorporates a number of companion protocols into its core specification. This course covers these general topics as well as the adoption of IPv6 in next generation 3GPP and 3GPP2 wireless services. Intended Audience This is an introductory course and does not assume any previous knowledge of IPv6. It is suitable for wireless professionals who want to gain an awareness of IPv4’s real limitations, the key issues with IPv6’s new capabilities, and how to transition the networks. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Discuss the different requirements of an IP network • Analyze the limitations of IPv4 networks • List the key aspects of IPv6 • Sketch the IPv6 addressing architecture and the new types of IP

addresses • Describe the Plug-n-Play capabilities of IPv6 • Describe wireless mobility solutions in IPv6 • Identify the impact of IPv6 on related protocols • Describe the use of IPv6 in 3G/4G wireless networks

Course Outline 1. Introduction

1.1. IP-based networks 1.2. Current state of IPv4 1.3. Key aspects of IPv6

2. IPv6 Headers 2.1. Disadvantages of IPv4 header

options 2.2. Extension header 2.3. Routing header 2.4. Destination/Hop-by-hop header 2.5. QoS features

3. IPv6 Addressing Architecture 3.1. Current IPv4 addressing limitations 3.2. Address formats of IPv6 3.3. Multicast addresses 3.4. New address category (Anycast) 3.5. Fragment header

4. Plug ‘n Play Aspects of IPv6 4.1. Host configuration 4.2. Stateless auto-configuration 4.3. Neighbor discovery 4.4. Stateful auto-configuration

5. IPv6 Impact on Other Protocols 5.1. Pseudo header 5.2. DNS for IPv6 5.3. DHCPv6

6. Interworking IPv4 and IPv6

6.1. Impact of IPv4 to IPv6 transition 6.2. Interworking IPv4 and IPv6 6.3. Deployment scenarios of IPv6

7. Wireless Mobility in IPv6 7.1. Mobility management essentials 7.2. Mobile IP solution 7.3. IPv6 mobility solution 7.4. Key mobility messages 7.5. IPv6 in 3GPP and 3GPP2

Page 71: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

68 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v3.9

Exploring MPLS Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: IPC_203

The Internet has to evolve on many fronts with regard to routing, QoS, addressing, efficiency and security. Multi Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) belongs to the group of technologies designed to achieve this evolution. MPLS is designed to make the Internet fast, scalable, manageable, carry multimedia traffic, support QoS and support new routing architectures. This course is designed for those who need to understand how to deploy and manage MPLS networks. The course consists of three parts. The first part discusses MPLS technology including MPLS concepts, terminology, and signaling protocols. Next we cover MPLS applications such as IP-VPN, Layer 2 VPN, Pseuodowires, QoS, Traffic Engineering, and Voice over MPLS. These concepts and applications are explained with examples. Intended Audience This course is appropriate for technical audiences that wish to understand the benefits of MPLS, its network architecture, options for signaling, and the major applications that MPLS supports. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Explore the benefits and rationale for MPLS • Sketch the MPLS network architecture, • Use the MPLS terminology and explain key concepts • Describe the use of MPLS signaling protocols • List and explain the applications of MPLS • Sketch the MPLS solutions for IP-VPN and Layer 2 VPN solutions • Learn how MPLS is used to support QoS • Show how Traffic Engineering (TE) operations are executed in an

MPLS network • Sketch the redundancy solutions in MPLS networks (e.g. FRR)

Course Outline 1. Prologue

1.1. The big picture 2. IP Foundation for MPLS

2.1. Communications overview 2.2. IP routing and forwarding 2.3. IP in ATM vs. MPLS networks

3. Introduction to MPLS 3.1. IP routing and forwarding 3.2. MPLS label switching

4. MPLS Networks 4.1. MPLS domain 4.2. Network components (LER, LSR) 4.3. Label Switched Path (LSP) 4.4. Forward Equivalence Class (FEC)

5. MPLS Labels 5.1. MPLS label structure 5.2. MPLS label binding 5.3. MPLS label distribution 5.4. Label swapping and forwarding

6. MPLS Protocols 6.1. Motivation for new protocols 6.2. Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) 6.3. RSVP 6.4. BGP and MP-BGP

7. MPLS and QoS 7.1. Motivation for QoS 7.2. DiffServ in MPLS

8. MPLS and Traffic Engineering

8.1. Motivation for traffic engineering 8.2. Traffic engineering 8.3. Traffic engineering process 8.4. Fast re-route

9. MPLS Virtual Private Networks 9.1. Virtual Private Networks overview 9.2. L2VPN 9.3. L3VPN

Page 72: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

69© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.2

Exploring IMS (R8) Instructor Led | Duration: 3 Days | Course ID: IPC_204

The IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) is an access-independent service control architecture that enables multimedia services to end users via Internet-based protocols. Expertise on IMS is essential for communication professionals to successfully develop and deploy new multimedia services that are IMS-based. This course investigates the IMS architecture including functions of nodes, key protocols and end-to-end operations for services using IMS. Enabling technologies and protocols such as SIP, Megaco, RTP and the use of these technologies within the IMS architecture are explored. Service continuity, interconnection, and current policy control are discussed. (Please note that this course does not cover any specific access technology.) Intended Audience This course is intended to provide a technical overview of the IMS. It is appropriate for all technical personnel as well as those in product management, technical sales, planning, architecture, design, deployment and support. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• List the motivation, benefits and challenges associated with IMS • Sketch IMS network architecture • List the functions of the key components in IMS • Explain functions of key protocols such as SIP, Megaco, and RTP • Describe basic IMS operations • Explain how IMS enables dynamic Quality of Service (QoS) • Explain how IMS provides a service delivery platform • Discuss the IMS security architecture • Describe the IMS interconnection strategy • Explain how IMS is being used to provide service continuity between

different access networks • Depict scenarios that illustrate interworking with the PSTN • Sketch the IMS charging architecture

Suggested Prerequisites

• IP Convergence Essentials (Instructor Led) • Overview of IMS (eLearning)

Course Outline 1. Introduction

1.1. The IP convergence big picture 1.2. Motivation and benefits of IMS

2. SIP Overview 2.1. Reference architecture 2.2. Operations

3. IMS Architecture 3.1. Reference architecture 3.2. Components and functions 3.3. CSCF, HSS, MGCF, MGW, etc.

4. IMS Signaling Protocols 4.1. IMS core network interfaces 4.2. IMS SIP 4.3. Diameter 4.4. Media protocols – H.248, RTP, RTCP

5. IMS Basic Operations - Registration 5.1. Overview 5.2. Discovery and selection of nodes 5.3. Authentication

6. IMS Basic Operations – Call Scenario 6.1. Overview 6.2. Media and QoS negotiation 6.3. Interworking with PSTN

7. IMS QoS 7.1. 3GPP policy and charging control 7.2. QoS flow example

8. IMS Services

8.1. IMS application server architecture

8.2. End to end applications 8.3. Network based applications 8.4. Media server interactions 8.5. Service Configuration (XCAP)

9. IMS Security 9.1. Key security challenges 9.2. Signaling and media protection 9.3. NAT/firewall traversal

10. Interconnection 10.1. IBCF 10.2. IPv6/IPv4 10.3. IMS SIP to Non-IMS SIP 10.4. IMS SIP to Non-SIP

11. IMS Mobility 11.1. IMS Centralized Services (ICS) 11.2. IMS Service Continuity (ISC) 11.3. SRVCC

12. Charging 12.1. Charging architecture 12.2. Offline charging 12.3. Online charging

Page 73: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

70 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

Exploring SIP, VoIP and IP Convergence with IMS Instructor Led | Duration: 4 Days

As wireless and wireline networks mature, data usage increases, and network infrastructure and services become more IP-centric, more personnel will be responsible for managing and working with IP-centric networks. A solid understanding of IP and data communications will be essential for personnel at all levels to be effective in a data-oriented environment. This course provides the background and concepts to understand the motivations of networks converging towards IP, how VoIP services operate on top of the newly converged network, and examines SIP, the dominant VoIP signaling protocol. It discusses the challenges of transport of media (voice and video) using IP (VoIP) as the transport service in telecommunication networks. It presents the unique flavor of this challenge from the perspective of the three basic types of network for the telecommunications world: Access networks, core networks, and services networks. Intended Audience This course is intended for those familiar with circuit-switched networks, IP-based data networks and wireless networks. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Define IP Convergence • Explain the possible evolution paths of today’s networks • Sketch the new IP converged network architecture • List the motivations for adopting voice over IP • Outline the steps to setup a VoIP call • Describe the requirements of QoS for real-time IP transport • Sketch QoS solutions for real-time IP transport • Define and explain the use of codecs • Discuss authentication and authorization for VoIP • Explain the SIP protocol and operations for session establishment,

changes, and termination • Give the correct syntax for and explain the proper use of SIP’s

request and response messages • Differentiate stateless, stateful and forking proxy servers • Recognize how SIP interacts with other signaling protocols • Describe the interworking with PSTN for VoIP • Dissect SIP traces for typical SIP services including VoIP • Describe LTE and IMS at a high level

Suggested Prerequisites

• IP Networking Workshop (Instructor Led)

Course Outline 1. IP Convergence Overview

1.1. Defining IP convergence 1.2. Motivations for convergence

1.2.1. Quad play 1.2.2. Other converged services

1.3. IP converged architecture 2. Setting up a Call: Voice over IP

2.1. Voice over IP call flow 2.1.1. Authentication 2.1.2. Authorization/admission control 2.1.3. QoS negotiation 2.1.4. Traffic flow monitoring

2.2. Video over IP call flow 2.3. SIP and SDP basics

3. QoS Requirements and Solutions 3.1. Carrier grade QoS and challenges

3.1.1. Voice/video quality, packet loss 3.1.2. Delay and jitter

3.2. Possible solutions 3.2.1. Over engineer 3.2.2. ATM/IP/MPLS 3.2.3. Intserv/diffserv 3.2.4. Adapting QoS

3.3. Intra-domain and Inter-domain QoS 3.3.1. SLAs

4. User Traffic Operations 4.1. Device traffic operations

4.1.1. Voice/video coding 4.1.2. Jitter handling

4.2. Edge network traffic operations 4.2.1. Header compression 4.2.2. Intserv-RSVP

4.3. Core network traffic operations 4.3.1. Diffserv

4.4. QoS policy enforcement 5. Interworking with Other Networks

5.1. Architecture and media gateways 5.2. SS7 signaling and IP 5.3. Megaco 5.4. End-to-end call set up with PSTN 5.5. Call setup for other edge network types

6. SIP Architecture 6.1. User agents 6.2. B2BUA

6.3. Proxy and redirect servers 6.4. The role of DNS 6.5. Registrar and location services 6.6. Peer-to-peer 6.7. Service Provider E2E architecture

7. SIP Protocol and Basic Operations 7.1. Transactions, dialogs and sessions 7.2. Message formats 7.3. Session Description Protocol (SDP) 7.4. The SDP offer/answer model 7.5. SIP transport options 7.6. Basic session establishment 7.7. Session establishment with

preconditions 7.8. Media transport using RTP or RTSP

8. Key SIP Operations 8.1. Common headers 8.2. Address of record and contact

address 8.3. Registration and de-registration 8.4. The routing of requests and

responses 8.5. Capability discovery 8.6. Signaling compression

9. Events and Presence 9.1. Events and event packages 9.2. Presence architecture 9.3. SUBSCRIBE and NOTIFY methods

10. SIP Security 10.1. Digest and proxy authentication 10.2. Encryption and privacy 10.3. Firewall and NAT traversal

10.3.1. STUN, ALG, ICE, UPnP 11. LTE in a Nutshell

11.1. Architecture 11.2. LTE radio tech 11.3. End-to-end data session setup 11.4. LTE interworking with 3G

12. IMS in a Nutshell 12.1. Motivation and architecture 12.2. IMS call model 12.3. End-to-end IMS session setup 12.4. Roaming with IMS

Page 74: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

71© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.4

Exploring Ethernet Backhaul Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: IPC_205

The 4th generation (4G) of wireless technologies promises a much higher air interface data rate (over 100 Mbps) to users while reducing the cost per bit for wireless service providers. The current T1/E1 backhaul will not be able to support the high data rate with reasonable costs. The backhaul is already becoming the bottleneck in the existing 3G networks and will continue to be a challenge for emerging 4G networks. These networks require IP based broadband backhaul solutions. This course provides the background and solutions for IP backhaul planning for 3G/4G radio networks, starting with a review of the trends in 3G/4G wireless data services and related backhaul challenges. An overview of IP/MPLS is given since it is seen as an emerging technology for backhaul operation. Finally, deployment considerations and a backhaul migration path are discussed along with an exercise to calculate backhaul requirements. Intended Audience This course is designed for those involved in planning, design and engineering of 3G/4G backhaul systems. It is suitable for backhaul network engineers and managers involved in deployment and operation of 3G/4G networks. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• List the requirements and challenges for 3G/4G backhaul • List 3G/4G wireless network backhaul options • Compare different backhaul facilities and explain the pros and cons

of the available solutions • Discuss the role of these key technologies from a backhaul

perspective, their operations and support: ATM, TDM, MPLS, Carrier Ethernet and IP

• Sketch the 2G/3G/4G integrated IP/Ethernet backhaul deployment architecture with full redundancy

• Compare key traditional and packet based timing and synchronization methods such as IEEE 1588

• Apply the end-to-end QoS concepts in IP and Ethernet integrated backhaul and their usage in SLA monitoring

• Calculate protocol overhead for various backhaul options for voice, Web, video, etc.

• Utilize traffic models to forecast backhaul requirements and calculate link bandwidths

• Explain backhaul/Ethernet testing scenarios with RFC 2544 and Y.1731 in-network testing

Suggested Prerequisites

• Basic knowledge of transport such as T1/E1 and SONET/SDH

Course Outline 1. LTE and EBH Motivation

1.1. Motivation 1.2. End-to-end network architecture 1.3. Possible EBH solutions

2. L2 Backhaul Solution 2.1. L2 backhaul architecture 2.2. VLANs, subnets 2.3. Static routes 2.4. Use of MPLS in backhaul 2.5. 2G, 3G and LTE paths

3. L3 Backhaul Solution 3.1. L3 backhaul architecture 3.2. VLANs, subnets 3.3. Static routes 3.4. Use of OSPF in backhaul 3.5. 2G, 3G and LTE paths

4. Metro/Carrier E Technology and Operations 4.1. Motivation and benefits 4.2. Network architecture 4.3. Service types 4.4. Service attributes 4.5. Circuit emulation – CESoPSN

5. Ethernet Backhaul Network Design Considerations 5.1. IP network routing/operations 5.2. Layer 2 and 3 design aspects 5.3. Redundancy in the backhaul network 5.4. Availability and resiliency

6. QoS, Timing and SLA

6.1. 2G/3G/LTE backhaul traffic profiles

6.2. End-to-end QoS support 6.3. Timing and synchronization 6.4. Packet mode timing IEEE 1588v2 6.5. OAM and performance metrics 6.6. SLA administration and

monitoring 7. Ethernet Backhaul Network Testing

and Deployment 7.1. Backhaul network testing with

RFC2544 7.2. Backhaul network turn-up 7.3. Network level testing with Y.1731 7.4. E-OAM and CFM

8. Ethernet Backhaul Network Planning 8.1. Network planning overview 8.2. Capacity planning issues 8.3. Backhaul technology selection

criteria 8.4. Traffic forecast and modeling 8.5. Bandwidth/capacity computation

Page 75: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

72 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.1

Voice and Video over IP Protocols and Technologies Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: IPC_206

Quad Play (voice, video, data and wireless) is the name of the game for the latest evolution in the communications industry. IP networks are the base on which these service are converging to deliver rich multimedia services to the consumer and enterprises. More personnel will be responsible for operating, maintaining and working with IP-centric networks. This course provides essential knowledge on voice and video services using IP (VoIP) in communications networks. We begin the course with an overview of the motivation and network architectures of today and tomorrow. We then provide an end-to-end view of call setup to establish voice and video services over IP networks. The course includes several exercises to reinforce key objectives. Throughout the course major protocols and technologies such as IP multicasting, SIP, H.248/GCP, IGMP, RTSP, SDP, RSVP, RTP, RTCP, MPLS, etc. are discussed as appropriate. Intended Audience This course is intended for those familiar with circuit-switched networks, IP-based data networks and wireless networks. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• List the motivations of delivering voice and video over IP • Sketch the changes in network architecture for VoIP • Outline the steps to setup a VoIP call and a video call • List and discuss key protocols used in edge (access) networks • List and discuss key protocols used in core networks • Describe the requirements of QoS for real-time IP transport • Sketch QoS solutions for voice & video in IP networks • Analyze the interworking of VoIP with legacy networks • Discuss authentication and authorization for VoIP • Identify access independent (core) functions • Identify access dependent functions • List security threats and solutions for VoIP networks • Identify Key Performance Indicators (KPI) for VoIP • Analyze capacity planning

Suggested Prerequisites

• Welcome to IP Networking (eLearning)

Course Outline 1. Introduction to Voice and Video over

IP 1.1. The convergence of communications 1.2. Motivation for VoIP 1.3. Network architecture 1.4. Key requirements

2. Setting up a Call: Voice and Video over IP 2.1. SIP architecture 2.2. SIP session basics 2.3. Capability discovery 2.4. Routing of SIP messages 2.5. Dialog identification 2.6. Extending SIP 2.7. Mechanisms for QoS

3. Facilities-based IPTV 3.1. Why IPTV 3.2. IPTV growth 3.3. IP unicasting and multicasting 3.4. IPTV network

4. Quality of Service (QoS) 4.1. Qos tools 4.2. The IntServ/RSVP solution 4.3. The Prioritiation story 4.4. The Label Switching story 4.5. The InterDomain QoS story

5. User Traffic Operations

5.1. Device based traffic operations 5.1.1. Voice/video coding 5.1.2. Jitter handling

5.2. Access network traffic operations 5.3. Core network traffic operations 5.4. QoS policy enforcement

6. Interworking with Other Networks 6.1. Architecture and media gateways 6.2. SS7 signaling and IP 6.3. Megaco 6.4. End-to-end call set up with PSTN

7. Deployment Considerations 7.1. VoIP network design 7.2. Capacity planning 7.3. Key performance indicators 7.4. Security

Page 76: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

73© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.2

Exploring IP Routing and Ethernet Bridging Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: IPC_207

IP Convergence is the key enabler for wireless, wire-line, cable and enterprise networks of the future. In-depth understanding of Interconnection of IP and Ethernet networks is essential for those designing, operating and monitoring large complex carrier networks. This course focuses on technologies and protocols used to connect different IP networks and Ethernet LAN segments to create large and complex IP networks using both Ethernet switching (Layer 2) and IP/MPLS routing (Layer 3). The course covers IP routing Protocols such as OSPF and BGPv4, as well as Ethernet bridging protocols STP, RSTP, MSTP and PVSTP+. In addition, the use of MPLS to interconnect networks through Layer 3 Virtual Private Networks (L3VPN) is covered in the course. Intended Audience This course is intended for those who are engaged in planning, operating and monitoring complex IP/Ethernet networks. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Sketch/configure Ethernet bridging solutions with L2 protocols such as MSTP

• Implement L2 redundancy using MSTP • Explain IP routing concepts • Implement basic multi-area OSPF routed networks • Detail the functions and the usage of the BGPv4 protocol • Implement BGP routed VPN solution • Isolate routing amongst different VRFs • List and explain key routing issues • Sketch how OSPF and BGP routing protocols and STP come together

in a 3G/4G wireless network • Troubleshoot basic routing failures

Suggested Prerequisites

• IP Networking Workshop (Instructor Led)

Course Outline 1. Prologue

1.1. Routing and switching in 4G – an end-to-end view

1.2. The lab configuration 2. Spanning Tree Protocol

2.1. Concepts 2.2. Rapid STP (RSTP) 2.3. Multiple STP (MSTP)

3. The Routing Table 3.1. How to read a routing table 3.2. Administrative distance 3.3. Longest match rule 3.4. Equal cost multiple path 3.5. Recursive searches 3.6. Troubleshooting black holes 3.7. Redistribution

4. OSPF Key Concepts 4.1. OSPF areas 4.2. Router types 4.3. Link state advertisements

5. OSPF in Wireless Networks 5.1. Neighbor discovery 5.2. Adjacencies 5.3. Database synchronization 5.4. End-to-end scenarios

5.4.1. Route propagation 5.4.2. Traffic flows

6. L3 VPNs in Wireless

6.1. Interconnecting MTSOs 6.2. Architecture 6.3. High level operations

7. BGPv4 Key Concepts 7.1. iBGP and eBGP 7.2. Route reflectors 7.3. Confederations

8. BGPv4 in Wireless Networks 8.1. Route manipulation using BGP

attributes 8.2. BGP communities 8.3. BGP path determination

9. L3VPN Routing 9.1. Provider/customer model 9.2. VPN Routing and Forwarding

(VRF) 9.3. VPN route distribution 9.4. VPN-IPv4 address family 9.5. Route distinguishers 9.6. Route targets

10. Putting it all together 10.1. End-to-end routing 10.2. End-to-end traffic 10.3. Routing issues

10.3.1. Route flapping 10.3.2. Convergence

Page 77: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

74 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.2

Ethernet Backhaul Planning Instructor Led | Duration: 3 Days | Course Number: IPC_301

The 4th generation (4G) of wireless technologies promises a much higher air interface data rate (over 100 Mbps) to users. Delivering such high data rates requires a very fast and efficient backhaul network. The current T1/E1 backhaul cannot support such high data rate with reasonable costs. These broadband networks require all-IP and Ethernet based broadband backhaul solutions. The first two days of this course explore various technology options and architectures for Ethernet backhaul solutions, including MPLS, Metro Ethernet over fiber, copper and microwave radio deployments. The third day introduces various planning tools needed for multimedia network planning. This requires a management network capably of viewing the applications network as a system rather that a series of network elements. The course focuses on demonstrating methods for estimating the backhaul requirements based on the type of geography served, expected adoption of new networks and traffic models for key applications. This is demonstrated through a detailed capacity planning exercise using Excel spreadsheets provided to the participants.

Intended Audience This course is designed for those involved in planning, design and engineering of 3G/4G backhaul systems. It is suitable for those who want to learn various strategies for sizing and deploying Ethernet backhaul. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• List the requirements and challenges for 3G/4G backhaul and wireless network backhaul options along with comparing different backhaul facilities and explain the pros and cons of the available solutions

• Discuss the role of these key technologies from a backhaul perspective, their operations and support: ATM, TDM, MPLS, Carrier Ethernet and IP

• Sketch the 2G/3G/4G integrated IP/Ethernet backhaul deployment architecture

• Compare key traditional and packet based timing and synchronization methods such as IEEE 1588

• Describe the evolution of today’s TDM-based backhaul to tomorrow’s Ethernet-based backhaul

• Apply the end-to-end QoS concepts in IP and Ethernet integrated backhaul and their usage in SLA monitoring

• Demonstrate how reliability analysis is used to achieve network availability requirements

• Outline the basic tasks in estimating backhaul capacity requirements for multimedia services

• Apply diffusion modeling techniques to forecast subscriber mixes • Apply traffic modeling to estimate throughput requirements and over-

subscription factors and use results to estimate IP backhaul link capacities required to meet stated QoS requirements

Required Equipment

• PC laptop supporting Microsoft Excel Suggested Prerequisites

• IP Convergence Essentials (Instructor Led) • Basic knowledge of telecommunications (T1/E1, SONET/SDH, etc.) • Basic understanding of data networking concepts such as IP routing

and protocol stacks

Course Outline 1. The “Big Picture”

1.1. IP convergence 1.2. Evolving radio technology 1.3. 2G/3G/4G backhaul architecture 1.4. IP Backhaul requirements

2. Wireless Network Backhaul Options 2.1. Overview of wireless backhaul 2.2. Key Ethernet transport options 2.3. Access network alternatives 2.4. Aggregation network alternatives 2.5. Global deployment landscape

3. Overview of ATM 3.1. ATM fundamentals 3.2. ATM adaptation layer 3.3. ATM QoS 3.4. IMA for wireless backhaul

4. MPLS Technology Overview 4.1. IP fundamentals for MPLS 4.2. IP routing and forwarding 4.3. MPLS fundamentals 4.4. L2VPNs

4.4.1. Pseudowires 4.4.2. VPLS; H-VPLS

4.5. L3VPNs 5. Microwave Technology Overview

5.1. Benefits and challenges on microwave

5.2. Deployment topologies 5.3. When to use/avoid 5.4. Microwave planning considerations

6. Ethernet-Based Backhaul Solutions 6.1. Ethernet basics 6.2. Carrier Ethernet (CE) defined 6.3. Ethernet Services Model (ESM) 6.4. CE service attributes 6.5. Circuit bonding 6.6. Circuit emulation over Ethernet 6.7. Timing considerations

7. Wireless Backhaul Evolution Scenario 7.1. 2G./3G/4G backhaul basics 7.2. TDM to Ethernet evolution

scenario 8. Capacity Planning for Multimedia

Wireless Backhaul 8.1. Network planning overview 8.2. Capacity planning issues 8.3. Overview of wireless multimedia

backhaul planning 8.4. Traffic characterization 8.5. Effective bandwidth 8.6. Subscriber forecasting

9. Mini-Backhaul Capacity Planning Workshop - Exercises 9.1. Exercise scenario description 9.2. Exercise plan

9.2.1. Subscriber forecasting 9.2.2. Subscriber characterization 9.2.3. Traffic modeling 9.2.4. Traffic geography 9.2.5. Effective bandwidth

Page 78: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

75© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

SIP and Diameter for IMS/VoLTE Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days

The Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) technology is a flexible and extensible protocol for making, changing, and terminating data sessions between one or more participants. SIP has been adopted by many wireless and wireline telecommunications providers. While the basic operations of the protocol are simple and straightforward, its level of sophistication and functional richness warrant a detailed analysis. This course provides an overview of the SIP architecture, related protocols and Diameter in the context of IMS and VoLTE. The focus is to provide an introduction to the SIP architecture, SIP protocol and Diameter to understand how these protocols come together with IMS and LTE to deliver voice services. Students will then step through some key SIP and Diameter operations as they relate to delivering Voice services. The course concludes with a discussion of a Call Setup scenario to tie all the concepts together. Intended Audience This introductory course addresses the needs of technical professionals who need to understand the use of SIP and Diameter in the context of IMS and LTE to deploy VoLTE services. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Explain the motivation for SIP for IMS and VoLTE • Describe the SIP architecture for IMS • List the key nodes and interfaces for IMS and VoLTE • Recognize how SIP interacts with other significant signaling

protocols • Describe Diameter and its role in the context of IMS/VoLTE • Describe Megaco and its role in the context of IMS/VoLTE • Explain the SIP protocol and operations for session establishment

and session changes • Describe key SIP operations including registration and

authentication • Synthesize at a high-level the concepts of SIP and Diameter and

how they apply to delivering VoLTE using IMS. Suggested Prerequisites

• Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) (eLearning) • Voice and Video over IP (VoIP) Overview (eLearning)

Course Outline 1. SIP Architecture for IMS

1.1. Reference architecture 1.2. Nodes and functions

1.2.1. CSCF, HSS 1.2.2. UE, AS, PCRF, PCEF 1.2.3. BGCF, MGCF, MGW 1.2.4. IBCF, TRGW

1.3. Interfaces 1.3.1. SIP interfaces 1.3.2. Diameter interfaces

1.3.2.1. Cx, Rx, Gx 1.3.3. Megaco interfaces

2. SIP and Related Protocols 2.1. Transactions, dialogs and sessions 2.2. Message formats 2.3. SIP

2.3.1. SIP extensions 2.3.2. SDP

2.4. RTP/RTCP 3. Diameter

3.1. Architecture and protocol 3.2. Message formats 3.3. Diameter extensions 3.4. DRA 3.5. Interface examples

4. Megaco 4.1. Message formats 4.2. Transactions 4.3. Contexts

5. Registration and Events

5.1. Registration 5.2. Authentication 5.3. User profile 5.4. Roles of application servers

6. SIP Operations 6.1. Call Setup

6.1.1. INVITE 6.1.2. ReINVITE 6.1.3. SIP/SDP 6.1.4. Megaco

7. Putting It All Together 7.1. VoLTE call setup

Page 79: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

76 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

Exploring Cloud Computing Service Models Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days

Cloud Computing (CC) is a multifaceted technology generally characterized by its Service Model (SM) type (Software as a Service – SaaS, Platform as a Service - PaaS, Infrastructure as a Service –IaaS). From a user’s perspective SaaS is the simplest, since the Cloud service provider provides everything (software, hardware, management of infrastructure, etc.). IaaS is the other extreme where the Cloud user must manage its own Virtual Machine (VM), but has the ability to configure it in any manner desired. This course will focus on Cloud Computing from the view of the SMs and presents a high level comparison of the three primary SMs, and where they may fit into a wireless networking environment. Students will be challenged throughout the course with review questions and relevant exercises, to reinforce the topics presented in the course material.

Intended Audience This course is intended for a technical audience interested in understanding the basics of Cloud Computing Service Models in the context of a Wireless Service Provider’s network. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Explain the motivation for deploying each of the three CC SMs • Describe the differences between SaaS, PaaS, and IaaS • Describe the economics of each SM as viewed by the user • Describe the economics of each SM as viewed by the provider • Explain each SM in the context of a Wireless Provider domains • List the technologies upon which CC is based • Describe the “virtualization” process for IaaS • Illustrate changes for Next Generation Data Centers • Illustrate preferred operational scenarios for each SM • Explain the role and tasks of a Hypervisor (VMM) • Sketch the virtualized CC architecture • Describe the key management issues faced by each SM

Suggested Prerequisites

• Cloud Computing Essentials for Business (Instructor Led)

Course Outline Background 1.

CC overview 1.1. SM preview (SaaS, PaaS, IaaS) 1.2. CC SMs vs. deployment models 1.3. Role of BPaaS 1.4. Commercial SM solutions 1.5. CC taxonomy and basic architecture 1.6.

CC Basics 2. CC system and software models 2.1. Distributed system models 2.2. Phased approach to CC deployment 2.3. CC evolution: SOA to CC to IoT 2.4. CC standards organizations 2.5.

Economics of three CC SMs 3. Business drivers 3.1. Business model ontology and 3.2.

framework Revenue model and pricing options 3.3. Cost model and business challenges 3.4. Economics user vs. provider 3.5. Integration of BSS and OSS 3.6. Management functions added for 3.7.

public Clouds Three CC SMs and Wireless 4.Networking

Applicability to the wireless domain 4.1. Redundancy and high availability 4.2. Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) 4.3. Interworking challenges 4.4.

SaaS Architecture 5. SaaS overview and architecture 5.1. User vs. CC provider view 5.2. Distinct roles 5.3. Operations 5.4. Management issues 5.5.

PaaS Architecture 6. PaaS overview and architecture 6.1. User vs. CC provider view 6.2. Distinct roles 6.3.

Operations 6.4. Network based systems 6.5. Management issues 6.6.

IaaS Architecture 7. IaaS overview and architecture 7.1. User vs. CC provider view 7.2. Distinct roles 7.3. Operations 7.4. Platform evolution 7.5. Network based systems 7.6. Management issues 7.7.

Business Process as a Service 8.(BPaaS)

BPaaS vs. (SaaS/PaaS/IaaS) 8.1. BPaaS architecture 8.2. BPaaS market drivers 8.3. BPaaS now and future 8.4.

Virtualization (PaaS; IaaS) 9. Virtualization (VM) 9.1. Hypervisor described 9.2. Hypervisor architecture 9.3. Hypervisor tasks 9.4.

9.4.1. Manage shared info 9.4.2. Grants, memory

management 9.4.3. VM scheduling and APIs

Next Gen Data Centers 10. Data management challenges 10.1. Next gen data center architecture 10.2. Storage virtualization 10.3. Design evolution 10.4.10.4.1. vPC, HSRP/VRRP 10.4.2. L2MP/TRILL 10.4.3. FCoE 10.4.4. Multitenancy New FC protocols 10.5.

Putting it all together 11. Example end-to-end operations 11.1.11.1.1. SaaS, PaaS, IaaS 11.1.2. BPaaS

Page 80: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

77© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

Exploring Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS) Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days

The definition of Cloud Computing (CC) is still evolving, but generally consists of an aggregation of computing resources that work cooperatively as a single computing resource. The course starts with a look at the definition and economics of CC and the IaaS model. This unified computing resource can be partitioned on request to define Virtual Machines (VMs) that CC user may request and pay on a usage basis. The primary CC service models are; SaaS (Software as a Service), PaaS (Platform as a Service), and IaaS (Infrastructure as a Service). Of the three models, IaaS offers the CC user the greatest flexibility and delegates to the CC user the most responsibility. Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA) is a complementary technology to CC and this relationship will be briefly reviewed. Students will be challenged throughout with review questions and relevant exercises, to reinforce the topics presented in the course material.

Intended Audience This course is intended for a technical audience interested in understanding the Infrastructure as a Service model in the context of a Telecom Service Provider’s network. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Explain the motivation for implementing IaaS • Describe the economics of and IaaS deployment • Explain IaaS in the context of a Telecom Providers’ domain • Define IaaS and Cloud Computing • List the technologies upon which CC is based • Describe the differences between SaaS, PaaS, and IaaS • Discuss when IaaS would be the preferred SPI model • Explain the role and tasks of a Hypervisor (VMM) • Discuss the role of Virtualization in CC • Describe where Data Centers and SANs fit into the CC architecture • Outline the key IaaS Management issues • Identify the key capacity planning issues

Suggested Prerequisites

• Cloud Computing Essentials for Business (Instructor Led)

Course Outline Background 1.

Motivation for CC and IaaS 1.1. Commercial IaaS vendors 1.2. CC taxonomy and basic architecture 1.3.

Cloud Computing Models 2. CC system and software models 2.1. CC delivery models (SPI) 2.2. Distributed system models 2.3. Phased approach to CC deployment 2.4. CC evolution: SOA to CC to IoT 2.5. Vendor overview 2.6.

Economics of IaaS Models 3. Business drivers 3.1. Business model ontology and 3.2.

framework Revenue model and pricing options 3.3. Cost model and business challenges 3.4.

IaaS Architecture 4. Platform evolution 4.1. Network based systems 4.2. Constructing IaaS 4.3. Cloud centers 4.4. Infrastructure web service 4.5. Cloud extenders 4.6.

IaaS Hypervisor 5. Virtualization (VM) 5.1. Hypervisor described 5.2. Hypervisor architecture 5.3. Hypervisor tasks 5.4. Manage shared Info 5.5. Grants, memory management 5.6. VM scheduling and APIs 5.7.

IaaS Operations 6. Description and CC role of IaaS 6.1. Primary building blocks of IaaS 6.2. Services and service-oriented 6.3.

infrastructure Service fulfillment 6.4.

Strategy, design, operation 6.5. IaaS operational management 6.6. Demand management 6.7. Financial management 6.8. Change management 6.9. Cloud bursting 6.10. Multi-tenant concept 6.11. Key IaaS vendors 6.12. Future: The Internet of Things (IoT) 6.13.

Data Centers and SANs 7. Data management challenges 7.1. Next gen data centers 7.2. Storage virtualization 7.3. vPC and HSRP 7.4. Ethernet link and FCoE 7.5. New FC protocols 7.6.

IaaS and the Telecom Provider 8. Applicability to the Telecom domain 8.1. Redundancy and high availability 8.2. Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) 8.3. Interworking challenges 8.4.

IaaS Management Issues 9. QoS; security; performance 9.1. Management Platform (CIMP) 9.2. Availability and reliability analysis 9.3.

in IaaS Management topics 9.4. Hierarchical management 9.5. Policy-based management 9.6. Mgmt mediation 9.7.

IaaS CC Capacity Planning 10. Capacity 10.1. IaaS user view 10.2. IaaS provider view 10.3. IaaS capacity planning 10.4. Impact of random demand 10.5.

Putting it all together 11. Example end-to-end operations 11.1. Exercise 11.2.

Page 81: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

78 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

Exploring the Service Oriented Architecture (SOA) Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days

Service Oriented Architecture (SOA) is basically a collection of services that are able to communicate with each other. To understand how this works we begin with a definition of what a “service” is. The course will provide a more detailed description of Service but we begin with the assumption that it is a self-contained function that is well-defined, and independent of context or state of other Services. SOA defines how to integrate disparate applications for a Web-based environment and may involve the use of multiple computing platforms. SOA and Cloud Computing (CC) are complementary activities and CC can provide a value-added base for SOA efforts. Also, IMS is a candidate architecture upon which SOA may be deployed. A scenario is presented where IMS is used to support the SOA model being deployed. SOA 2.0 (Event-Driven SOA) is the evolution of SOA (SOA 1.0). Students will be challenged throughout with review questions and relevant exercises, to reinforce the topics presented in the course material.

Intended Audience This course is intended for a technical audience interested in understanding the Service Oriented Architecture in the context of a Telecom Service Providers’ network. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Describe the difference between SOA and CC • List the key benefits and challenges of SOA networks • Define the term “Service” • Explain SOA in the context of a Telecom Providers’ domain • Sketch the basic SOA architecture • Illustrate the SOA types • Explain the basic properties of SOA • Illustrate the Basic Provider-Consumer SOA Model • Explain the role that IMS can play in an SOA network • Sketch a general IMS network architecture • List key SOA sup[porting technologies • Discuss how SOA 2.0 extends the function of SOA 1.0 • Describe how the Causal Vector Engine is used in SOA 2.0

Suggested Prerequisites • Cloud Computing Essentials for Business (Instructor Led)

Course Outline SOA Overview 1.

SOA Defined and Described 1.1. SOA Principles 1.2. SOA vs. CC 1.3. Benefits and Challenges 1.4. Vendors 1.5.

SOA Basic Concepts 2. What is a “Service”? 2.1. Service Orientation 2.2. SOA Properties 2.3. Types of SOAs 2.4. SOA Properties 2.5. Logical View 2.6. Message Orientation 2.7. Description Orientation 2.8. Metadata Catalogs 2.9. Database Publish-Subscribe 2.10. Key Supporting Technologies 2.11. SOAP 2.12. REST 2.13. CORBA 2.14.

SOA Architecture 3. SOA Development Options 3.1. Service Oriented Modeling 3.2.

Framework (SOMF) SOA Components 3.3. Registries and Repository 3.4. Service Broker 3.5. Infrastructure Services 3.6. BPOM 3.7. Service Bus 3.8. SOA Meta Model 3.9. Grid Services and OGSA 3.10.

Service Connection Architecture 3.11.(SCA)

SOA Deployment 4. Basic Provider-Consumer Model 4.1. SOA Building Blocks 4.2. Orchestration and Automation 4.3. Job Execution Environments and 4.4.

Monitoring Workflow in SOA 4.5. SOA and Web 2.0 4.6. Deployment Scenario 4.7.

IMS Basics 5. IMS Architecture 5.1. Basics of SIP 5.2. Role of the AS 5.3. Subscriber profile 5.4. SOA in IMS Scenario 5.5.

SOA and the Telecom Provider 6. Applicability to the Telecom 6.1.

domain Redundancy and High Availability 6.2. Key Performance Indicators 6.3. Interworking challenges 6.4.

Event Driven SOA (SOA 2.0) 7. Description 7.1. Causal Vector Engine 7.2. SOA 2.0 scenario 7.3. Closed System Modeling 7.4. Data Enrichment and Mediation 7.5.

Flows SOA 2.0-IMS Scenario 7.6.

Putting it all together 8. Example end-to-end operations 8.1. Exercise 8.2.

Page 82: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

79© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

About the CurriculumAward Solutions’ UMTS (WCDMA) and HSPA+ curriculum offers a suite of courses appropriate for all audiences - from executives in need of a quick overview to designers and developers seeking the details of the messages, including the parameters and the rationale behind the standards.

Self-paced eLearning CoursesWelcome To UMTSOverview of UMTSUMTS/WCDMA Air Interface Fundamentals UMTS SignalingUMTS MobilityHSDPA (R5)HSUPA (R6)HSPA+ Overview (R7)

Instructor Led CoursesExploring UMTS (WCDMA)Exploring HSPA+ (R7, R8 & R9)Multi-Carrier HSPA+ (R8 & R9)Mastering UMTS Core Networks (R99 to R7)Mastering UMTS Radio Protocols and SignalingMastering HSPA Protocols and SignalingHSPA+ Protocols and Signaling (R7, R8 & R9)IMS in UMTS (R8) Networks3GPP Packet Core Networks (R99 to R8)UMTS/HSPA/HSPA+ Air InterfaceUMTS/HSPA (WCDMA) RF Design MentoringUMTS (WCDMA) RF Optimization MentoringUMTS/HSPA+ Optimization Workshop

UMTS(WCDMA)isa3Gtechnologydeployedthroughouttheworld.ItevolvedfromtheGSM/GPRScorenetwork,andredefinedtheradioaccessnetwork. It gives users a comprehensive, user-friendly and personalized mobile experience with a combined voice and data network.

The UMTS (WCDMA) and HSPA+ system replaces the Circuit Switched Core Network (CS-CN) with a SIP-based network and an IP-based radio access network. These enhancements provide all services on one consolidated, IP-based wireless network.

UMTS/HSPA+

Please refer to the LTE curriculum for the UMTS evolution path to LTE.

Welcome to UMTS eLearning Course

Page 83: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

80 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v2.0

Welcome To UMTS eLearning | Average Duration: 1.5 hours | Course Number: UMTS102

Wireless communications have come a long way from early implementations to today’s wide offering of available services. This course provides a UMTS overview of mobile wireless communications. Mobile wireless networks, their elements and their functions are described. A description of mobile wireless services and their delivery to the mobile subscriber is also provided. There is a brief look at the evolution of UMTS to 4G technologies. This course is intended for individuals who desire a general understanding of mobile wireless communications focused on UMTS. Participants are not required to be technically oriented to benefit from this course. At the conclusion of this course, participants will have a familiarity with mobile wireless communications, the networks and their elements, their functions and operations required to deliver voice and data service. Intended Audience This course is intended for individuals who are new to the wireless industry or desire a general level understanding of wireless communications. Participants are not required to be technically oriented to benefit from this course. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• List the key motivations for moving from 2G to 3G • Identify the difference between GSM/GPRS and UMTS • Identify UMTS network elements and their functions • Describe UMTS Service Delivery call flows • Describe the evolution moving forward from UMTS

Suggested Prerequisites

• Welcome to Wireless Networks (eLearning) • Welcome to GSM/GPRS (eLearning)

Complementary Courses • Exploring GSM (Instructor Led) • Exploring GPRS and EDGE (Instructor Led) • Exploring UMTS (WCDMA) (Instructor Led)

Knowledge Knuggets 1. Introduction 2. History from 2G to 3G

2.1. Evolution of wireless technologies 2.2. 2G limitations 2.3. 2.5G technology 2.4. Evolution from 2.5G to 3G 2.5. Why UMTS

3. UMTS Network 3.1. What is UMTS 3.2. Wideband CDMA 3.3. Comparison of technologies 3.4. GSM/GPRS 2G networks 3.5. GSM/GPRS 2.5G networks 3.6. UMTS network 3.7. UMTS Radio network 3.8. Interface core network and UTRAN 3.9. UMTS key features

4. Service Delivery 4.1. Radio network acquisition 4.2. UMTS behaviors 4.3. UMTS attach 4.4. UMTS PDP context activation 4.5. Data transfer 4.6. Context deactivation and detach 4.7. Voice call flows

5. Moving Forward from UMTS

5.1. UMTS roadmap 5.2. 3G UMTS 5.3. 3G UMTS - HSDPA 5.4. 3G UMTS – HSUPA 5.5. 3G UMTS – HSPA+ 5.6. 3G challenges 5.7. Wish List - 4G 5.8. 4G technology requirements 5.9. 4G building blocks 5.10. Multiple access technologies 5.11. Why OFDM 5.12. Why multiple antennas 5.13. 4G architecture design goals 5.14. Network architecture evolution 5.15. 4G radio network 5.16. 4G core network components 5.17. What is LTE

Put It All Together Assess the knowledge of the participant based on the objectives of the course

Page 84: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

81© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v5.0

Overview of UMTS eLearning | Average Duration: 2 Hours | Course Number: UMTS103

UMTS creates a platform to converge the worlds of speech, data services and the Internet to create a global market for mobile multimedia. This course discusses the broad scope of UMTS, its characteristics, its features and its evolution from second generation architecture. It also provides the student with a “sampler,” which draws the attention of the students to various areas of UMTS such as the access network, core network, services from voice to multimedia and the future of UMTS. Intended Audience This course is intended for anyone seeking an overview of UMTS, its features and capabilities. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Provide a summary of the limitations of 2G wireless networks • Explain the key characteristics of 3G systems and the genesis of

UMTS • Highlight key features of UMTS networks • Describe the UMTS standards releases and their functionality • Identify the elements of the UMTS architecture and understand their

interfaces • Describe traffic delivery of circuit switched and packet switched

information within the UMTS network

Complementary Courses • Overview of 3G Wireless Networks (eLearning)

Knowledge Knuggets 1. Introduction

1.1. Applications 1.2. Capabilities of 1G and 2G systems 1.3. Limitations of 2G 1.4. Requirements of 3G

2. 3G Characteristics 2.1. Key 3G characteristics 2.2. Requirements of 3G

3. Genesis of UMTS 3.1. UMTS standards development 3.2. Modes of operation 3.3. Spectrum allocation

4. Key Features of UMTS 4.1. Backward compatibility with

GSM/GPRS/EDGE open interfaces 4.2. UMTS QoS classes

5. UMTS Road map of Releases 5.1. Sequence 5.2. Features in each release

6. UMTS Architecture 6.1. Technology landscape 6.2. Core network architecture 6.3. UTRAN architecture 6.4. UMTS interfaces

7. UMTS Scenarios

7.1. Establish a CS call 7.2. Establish a PS call 7.3. UMTS traffic delivery

8. Summary

Put It All Together Assess the knowledge of the participant based on the objectives of the course

Page 85: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

82 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v2.0

UMTS/WCDMA Air Interface Fundamentals eLearning | Average Duration: 3 Hours | Course Number: UMTS104

UMTS is an evolution of GSM and GPRS. The air interface has been changed from a Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) based system to a Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA) based air interface. This change was required to achieve the data rate of 2 Mbps to the mobile, which is a 3G requirement. This course provides the details of the UMTS WCDMA air interface, known as UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA). The WCDMA physical layer is key to achieving higher data rates and supporting new features. This course provides an overview of the physical layer. In addition, power control and soft handover, important features of any CDMA air interface, are discussed. The UMTS defined radio interface includes a number of channels, which are presented with an explanation of their usage. This course concludes with a discussion of how high data rates and multiple simultaneous services are delivered using UMTS. Intended Audience This course is intended for those seeking a detailed understanding of the WCDMA air interface that is used in UMTS. This includes those in a design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering network engineering, or verification role. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Explain spreading factor codes in UMTS WCDMA • Describe the use of scrambling codes for source identification in

both the uplink and downlink in WCDMA • Describe power control operations in the UMTS WCDMA system • Explain the basics of soft handoff processing from the perspective

of the physical layer • Identify the features designed into the WCDMA system which enable

high data rates • Describe the types of channels found in the UMTS radio interface

and their purpose • Explain how concurrent services are supported by UMTS radio

interface Suggested Prerequisites

• Overview of UMTS (eLearning) Complementary Courses

• 3G Comparative Overview (Instructor Led) • UMTS Signaling (eLearning) • UMTS Mobility (eLearning)

Knowledge Knuggets 1. UMTS WCDMA Overview

1.1. Introduction to Wideband CDMA 2. UMTS WCDMA Channels

2.1. Overview of UMTS channel structure 3. WCDMA Physical Layer Processing

3.1. Protection of data 3.2. Separation channels 3.3. Scrambling codes

4. WCDMA Power Control 4.1. Introduction to power control 4.2. Requirements of power control 4.3. WCDMA power control process

5. Soft Handover in WCDMA 5.1. Introduction to soft handover 5.2. The RAKE receiver 5.3. Inter radio access technology

handover procedure 6. Delivering High Data Rates in UMTS

6.1. Variable length spreading factors 6.2. Impact of protection on data rates 6.3. How to achieve 2 Mbps

6.3.1. QPSK modulation 6.3.2. Multiple codes

7. Concurrent Services, an Air Interface Perspective 7.1. Support of multiple simultaneous

services by the mobile 7.2. Support concurrent services

7.3. Communication of information

between the UE and the network 8. Summary

Put It All Together Assess the knowledge of the participant based on the objectives of the course

Page 86: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

83© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v2.0

UMTS Signaling eLearning | Average Duration: 1 Hour | Course Number: UMTS105

The need for a 3G network to provide more value added services to wireless subscribers has become apparent. UMTS provides a new, "open" communications universe that will allow service providers to supply a host of new services. All of these services are offered in UMTS using two basic mechanisms. The first is circuit switched call setup to support the traditional voice based services. The second is packet-switched data session establishment. This is used to establish data sessions based on the services’ bandwidth and Quality of Service requirements. This course offers an eLearning experience of UMTS signaling. This course also discusses the processes of establishing a circuit-switched voice call and a packet-switched data session. Intended Audience This course is intended for those seeking a detailed understanding of the WCDMA air interface that is used in UMTS. This includes those in a design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering network engineering, or verification role. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Highlight the differences between user plane and control plane • Specify different radio access signaling and core network signaling

protocols • Define the basic circuit-switched call setup in UMTS • Explain how the signaling and control mechanisms are used in

UMTS • Define the “Always connected” paradigm in UMTS networks • Describe traffic delivery of packet data information within the UMTS

network Suggested Prerequisites

• Overview of UMTS (eLearning) Complementary Courses

• Overview of 3G Wireless Networks (eLearning) • UMTS Mobility (eLearning)

Knowledge Knuggets 1. Signaling and User Traffic in UMTS

1.1. Signaling responsibilities of network elements

1.2. Overview of the UMTS signaling (or control) plane

1.3. Overview of the UMTS traffic (or user) plane

1.4. UMTS radio access signaling mechanisms

1.5. UMTS core network signaling mechanisms

1.6. Signaling protocols on the Iub, Iur and Iu interfaces

2. Making a Circuit Switched Phone Call in UMTS 2.1. Call establishment process 2.2. Information that is exchanged during

call establishment 2.3. Circuit switched core network

protocol model 3. Starting a Packet Session in UMTS

3.1. UMTS support for the “Always connected” paradigm

3.2. Data session establishment process 3.3. Information that is exchanged in

data session establishment 3.4. Tunneling 3.5. Packet switched core network

protocol model

4. Summary

Put It All Together Assess the knowledge of the participant based on the objectives of the course

Page 87: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

84 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v2.0

UMTS Mobility eLearning | Average Duration: 1 Hour | Course Number: UMTS106

UMTS is designed to provide value-added services, many of which will allow the subscriber to receive services while on the move. This course discusses the process of managing mobility in UMTS networks. Mobility management is required while the mobile is idle, in a circuit-switched voice call or in a packet-switched data session. This course covers all these aspects of mobility. In addition, certain UMTS specific mobility features are discussed, and the participants are provided with an understanding of the mobility aspects of the UMTS network. Intended Audience This course is intended for those seeking a detailed understanding of the processes of signaling and mobility management during a call or a packet session. This includes those in a design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering, network engineering, and verification. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Describe the UMTS radio mobility aspects • Define the requirements of location management within the UMTS

network • Discuss core network mobility including location areas and routing

areas • Illustrate the differences between mobility when the mobile is idle

and when the mobile is connected • Explain the mobility management messaging used to support

mobility in UMTS Suggested Prerequisites

• Overview of UMTS (eLearning) Complementary Courses

• Overview of 3G Wireless Networks (eLearning) • UMTS Signaling (eLearning)

Knowledge Knuggets 1. Mobility Management in UMTS

1.1. Introduction to Mobility Management functions

1.2. Mobility Management responsibilities 2. Mobility Management when the

Mobile is Idle 2.1. Location tracking when the mobile is

in idle mode 2.2. Responsibilities of the mobile in idle

mode 3. Mobility Management when the

Mobile is Connected 3.1. Location tracking when the mobile is

connected to the network 3.2. Responsibilities of the mobile when

it is connected 3.3. Mobility management procedures

when the mobile is using common channels

3.4. Mobility management procedures when the mobile is using dedicated channels

4. Serving Radio Network Controller (SRNC) Relocation 4.1. Responsibilities of the SRNC 4.2. Support provided by the DRNC 4.3. Procedures used in SRNC relocation

5. Seamless Mobility in UMTS

5.1. Requirements of seamless mobility

5.2. Procedures for seamless mobility 6. Summary

Put It All Together Assess the knowledge of the participant based on the objectives of the course

Page 88: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

85© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v4.0

HSDPA (R5) eLearning | Average Duration: 3 Hours | Course Number: UMTS107

UMTS networks are being rapidly deployed in many parts of the world to support 3G voice and packet data services. As the UMTS subscriber base grows, operators are looking to support next generation packet data services that require very high data rates. To compete with other technologies such as 1xEV-DO, the UMTS standards group has defined High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA) as part of the UMTS (Release 5) standards. This course provides an overview of the HSDPA R5 technology. It describes the key concepts used in the wireless environment to support high data rates, and examines how these concepts are applied within the HSDPA R5 standards. HSDPA R5 specific channels are introduced followed by a detailed discussion of the HSDPA physical layer operations. A discussion of UMTS and HSDPA R5 interworking is also presented. The course concludes with an end-to-end HSDPA R5 call flow. Intended Audience This course is intended for those seeking an understanding of HSDPA R5 technology and how it supports high speed packet data. This includes those in product management, design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering, network engineering, RF deployment engineering, and field engineering and operations roles. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Describe HSDPA R5 at a high level • Define important features of HSDPA R5 including peak data rates,

new channels and architectural changes • Discuss the key concepts used in HSDPA R5 to achieve high packet

data rates over the air • Analyze the steps taken in HSDPA R5 physical layer operations to

support high speed packet data • Describe the role of the scheduler in HSDPA R5 • Explain how HSDPA R5 achieves data rates over 10Mbps • Discuss cell switching operation on the traffic channel • Walk though an end-to end HSDPA R5 call flow

Suggested Prerequisites

• Overview of UMTS (eLearning) • UMTS/WCDMA Air Interface Fundamentals (eLearning)

Complementary Courses

• UMTS Signaling (eLearning) • UMTS Mobility (eLearning)

Knowledge Knuggets 1. HSDPA R5 Introduction

1.1. High-level solution 1.2. Data rates supported 1.3. Packet data characteristics 1.4. How does HSDPA address packet

data characteristics? 2. HSDPA R5 Key Concepts

2.1. Link adaptation UMTS vs. HSDPA 2.2. Fast channel quality reporting 2.3. TDM-CDM scheduling 2.4. Adaptive modulation 2.5. Hybrid ARQ

3. HSDPA R5 Architecture 3.1. UTRAN architecture review 3.2. HSDPA R5 functions 3.3. HSDPA R5 impact to UTRAN

architecture 3.4. Implementation impact on UE and

UTRAN 4. HSDPA R5 Downlink channels

4.1. HS-DPCCH functions 4.2. HS-SCCH functions 4.3. HS-DSCH functions 4.4. Timing relationship between

channels 5. HSDPA R5 Downlink Operation Details

5.1. Physical layer packet transmission details

5.2. Hybrid ARQ

5.3. How do we get high data rates? 5.4. Traffic channel scheduler 5.5. UE HSDPA processing steps

6. Mobility 6.1. Active set management 6.2. Traffic channel cell switching

7. End-to-End Call Flow 7.1. Example end-to-end HSDPA R5

call flow 8. Summary

Put It All Together Assess the knowledge of the participant based on the objectives of the course

Page 89: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

86 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v2.0

HSUPA (R6) eLearning | Average Duration: 2.5 Hours | Course Number: UMTS108

UMTS networks are being rapidly deployed in many parts of the world to support 3G voice and packet data services. As the UMTS subscriber base continues to grow, operators want to support next generation packet data services that require very high data rates. To compete with other technologies such as 1xEV-DO, the UMTS standards group has defined High Speed Uplink Packet Access (HSUPA) as part of the UMTS (Release 6) standards. This course provides an overview of HSUPA technology. It describes the key concepts used in the wireless environment to support high data rates, and examines how these concepts are applied within the HSUPA standards. In addition, it discusses the impact of HSUPA support on the UMTS network architecture by highlighting key changes at different nodes. HSUPA specific channels are introduced followed by a detailed discussion of the HSUPA physical layer operations. Intended Audience This course is intended for those seeking an understanding of HSUPA technology and how it supports high speed packet data. This includes those in product management, design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering, network engineering, RF deployment engineering, and field engineering and operations roles. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Describe HSUPA at a high level • Define important features of HSUPA including peak data rates, new

channels and architectural changes • Discuss the key concepts used in HSUPA to achieve high packet

data rates over the air • Analyze the steps taken in HSUPA physical layer operations to

support high speed packet data • Explain the role of the scheduler in HSUPA • Walk through an end-to-end HSUPA call flow

Suggested Prerequisites

• UMTS/WCDMA Air Interface Fundamentals (eLearning) • HSDPA (R5) (eLearning)

Knowledge Knuggets 1. Introduction

1.1. Capabilities and limitations of UMTS and HSDPA

1.2. Motivation for HSUPA 1.3. Supported data rates of HSUPA

2. Key Concepts of HSUPA 2.1. Effective interference / load control 2.2. Fast scheduling at Node B 2.3. Absolute and relative grants 2.4. Hybrid ARQ

3. HSUPA Architecture Enhancements 3.1. HSUPA impact to UTRAN architecture 3.2. HSUPA functions 3.3. Implementation impact on UE and

UTRAN 4. Enhanced Channels of HSUPA

4.1. Enhanced Uplink Channels E-DCH and related channels

5. HSUPA Operations 5.1. Physical layer packet transmission

details 5.2. How do we get high data rates?

6. Mobility and Power Control 6.1. Mobility and handover

enhancements 6.2. Power control strategy for E-DCH

7. End-to-End Call Flow 7.1. Example end-to-end HSUPA call flow

8. Summary

Put It All Together Assess the knowledge of the participant based on the objectives of the course

Page 90: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

87© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v3.0

HSPA+ Overview (R7) eLearning | Average Duration: 4 Hours | Course Number: UMTS109

UMTS is a 3G cellular technology that is being deployed around the globe to support voice and packet data services. The air interface of the first release of UMTS (i.e., Release 99) is enhanced by the HSDPA feature of Release 5 and the HSUPA feature of Release 6. Release 7 enhances the UMTS air interface even further to achieve high peak data rates such as 21 or 28 Mbps in the downlink and 11 Mbps in the uplink. This course provides an overview of the major enhancements to HSPA (R6) that lead to high peak data rates and lower latency provided in HSPA+. Examples of the topics covered include architecture enhancements, High Order Modulation (HOM), MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output), CPC (Continuous Packet Connectivity), and radio channel enhancements. The call setup in HSPA+ is illustrated, and both downlink data transmission and uplink data transmission are discussed. Intended Audience This course is intended for those seeking an understanding of HSUPA+ technology and how it enhances downlink and uplink data transfer. This includes those in product management, design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering, network engineering, RF deployment engineering, and field engineering and operations roles. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• List key features, benefits and limitations of HSPA+ • Sketch the architectural enhancements in HSPA+ • Discuss the key concepts in HSPA+ to achieve high packet data

rates in the downlink and the uplink • Describe CPC (Continuous Packet Connectivity) • Summarize the radio channel enhancements • Walk through an end-to-end HSPA+ call flow

Suggested Prerequisites

• UMTS/WCDMA Air Interface Fundamentals (eLearning) • HSDPA (R5) (eLearning) • HSUPA (R6) (eLearning)

Knowledge Knuggets 1. Introduction

1.1. Evolution of UMTS 1.2. Capabilities and limitations of HSPA 1.3. Performance goals for HSPA+ 1.4. Main features and benefits of HSPA+

2. Key Concepts of HSPA+ 2.1. High Order Modulation (HOM) 2.2. MIMO 2.3. CPC 2.4. Radio channel enhancements 2.5. Architecture options 2.6. UE categories and capabilities

3. Downlink Data Transmission 3.1. Overview of HSDPA operation 3.2. High-level view of DL transmission 3.3. HSPA+ enhancements for DL

transmission (ex: MIMO and HS-SCCH less operation)

4. Uplink Data Transmission 4.1. Overview of HSUPA operation 4.2. High-level view of UL transmission 4.3. HSPA+ enhancements for UL

transmission (Ex: HOM) 5. CPC (Continuous Packet Connectivity)

5.1. Fast session setup/resumption 5.2. DTX 5.3. DRX

6. End-to-End Call Flow 6.1. End-to-end HSPA+ call flow

7. Summary

Put It All Together Assess the knowledge of the participant based on the objectives of the course

Page 91: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

88 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v4.2

Exploring UMTS (WCDMA) Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days| Course Number: UMTS201

UMTS (WCDMA) is one of the 3rd generation wireless systems. UMTS is designed to increase a subscriber’s data rates and system capacity. This course offers a technical overview of UMTS, focusing on the UMTS (WCDMA) air interface, radio networks and core networks. It covers the network architecture, components and basic operations of UMTS networks. In addition, this course explores the details of the WCDMA air interface technology and its ability to support multiple subscribers simultaneously. Aspects of CDMA technology pertaining to the WCDMA air interface including coding, modulation, spreading, scrambling, handovers and power control mechanisms are clearly explained. This course then focuses on Circuit Switched and Packet Switched Core Networks. The key concepts in the course are tied together with several system scenarios to provide insight into location management, mobility management and handovers. Intended Audience This course is intended to provide a technical overview of UMTS (WCDMA). It is appropriate for personnel in planning, deployment, RF engineering, network performance, and network operations. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Identify the driving forces, requirements and goals of UMTS • List the capabilities of UMTS (WCDMA) • Explain the evolution from GSM/GPRS/EDGE networks • Sketch the network architecture and identify the network nodes and

interfaces • Describe how functions such as mobility management and

handovers are performed in UMTS • Step through the setup of voice and data calls in UMTS networks • Identify the UMTS-GSM interworking scenarios • Discuss the features and benefits of HSDPA and HSUPA

Suggested Prerequisites • Welcome to Wireless Networks (eLearning) • Exploring GSM (Instructor Led) • Exploring GPRS and EDGE (Instructor Led)

Course Outline 1. UMTS Overview

1.1. Motivations for 3G 1.2. UMTS spectrum 1.3. UMTS QoS 1.4. UMTS security

2. WCDMA in UMTS 2.1. Comparison of technologies 2.2. Spread spectrum techniques 2.3. Channelization and scrambling codes 2.4. Power control 2.5. Handover and reselection

3. UMTS Core Network 3.1. Access and non-access stratums 3.2. Iu Interface 3.3. RANAP 3.4. Circuit-switched architecture 3.5. Packet-switched architecture

4. UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN) 4.1. UTRAN functions 4.2. UTRAN components 4.3. UTRAN interfaces

5. UTRAN Channels and Protocols 5.1. Cannel types and channel structure 5.2. RRC and the radio access bearer

6. Circuit-Switched Scenarios 6.1. UE-initiated voice call 6.2. UE-terminated voice call

7. Packet-Switched Scenarios

7.1. UMTS basics for packet domain 7.2. Wireless Internet over UMTS

8. System Scenarios 8.1. Mobility – Idle state 8.2. Handovers 8.3. SRNS relocation

9. The Evolution of UMTS 9.1. High Speed Downlink Packet

Access (HSDPA) 9.2. HSDPA system architecture 9.3. Key concepts 9.4. High Speed Uplink Packet Access

(HSUPA) 9.5. IP Multimedia Subsystems (IMS)

Page 92: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

89© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

Exploring HSPA+ (R7, R8 & R9) Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days

This course provides a fundamental understanding of HSPA+ features defined in Release 7 through Release 9. HSPA+ refers to the enhancements of the basic HSPA operation defined for R5 HSDPA and R6 HSUPA and focuses on the air interface to improve spectral efficiency. The course first gives an overview of the main HSPA+ features and associated benefits. Once the overview is given, details of the features are discussed based on their primary benefits. First, the throughput-enhancing features are discussed, and then the features that help lower the latency and/or UE power consumption are narrated. The overall call setup process is illustrated next with a focus on HSPA+ configuration. Details of the data transfer in the DL and the UL are given. After covering the deployment and interworking considerations, a description of R9 HSPA+ features is given. This course takes a close look at all the major HSPA+ features. Intended Audience This course is designed for those involved in the design, deployment, operation, and optimization of HSPA+ networks. It is suitable for planners and engineers responsible for network planning, design and deployment, integration and network operations. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• List main HSPA+ features and the associated benefits • Identify the impact of HSPA+ on the network and the UE • Explain how HOM, MIMO, and advanced receiver designs enable

high throughput • Describe how DTX, DRX, enhanced CELL_FACH, and the direct

tunnel architecture reduce latency and/or UE power consumption • Summarize how the UE is configured to operate in HSPA+ • Illustrate the basic steps of DL and UL data transfer • Discuss upcoming HSPA+ features in R8 and R9, such as Dual Cell

operations in the UL and the combined MIMO feature in the DL

Suggested Prerequisites • Mastering HSPA Protocols and Signaling (Instructor Led) • HSPA+ Overview (R7) (eLearning)

Course Outline 1. HSPA+ Overview

1.1. Evolution of UMTS (R99 to R9) 1.2. HSPA+: Promises and challenges 1.3. Summary of key HSPA+ features and

associated benefits 1.3.1. Antenna techniques for the DL 1.3.2. High-Order Modulation (DL

and UL) 1.3.3. CPC (DTX, DRX, enhanced

CELL_FACH, and HS-SCCH-less operation)

1.3.4. Direct tunnel architecture 1.3.5. Dual Cell feature

1.4. Impact of HSPA+ on UE and network 1.4.1. Network upgrades 1.4.2. UE categories and upgrades

2. Features for Throughput Enhancements 2.1. High-Order Modulation (HOM)

2.1.1. Support of Higher Order Modulation in UL and DL

2.2. Multiple antenna techniques: Concepts and implementation 2.2.1. Open loop and closed loop

transmit diversity 2.2.2. (2x2) MIMO

2.3. Layer 2 RLC/MAC enhancements 2.4. Advanced receiver designs 2.5. Dual 2.6. F-DPCH enhancements

3. Features for Improvements in Latency and Power Consumption 3.1. DTX and DRX

3.2. Enhanced CELL_FACH 3.3. Direct tunnel architecture

4. Call Setup and Mobility Management 4.1. Overall call flow 4.2. HSPA+ configuration 4.3. Mobility management (active and

idle) 5. Advanced DL and UL Traffic

Operations 5.1. Overall DL data transfer (with and

without HS-SCCH) 5.2. Overall UL data transfer 5.3. CPICH enhancements 5.4. CQI enhancements (CQI Types A

and B) 5.5. HS-DPCCH enhancements 5.6. Types of HS-SCCHs 5.7. Retrieval of a DL packet from HS-

DSCH 5.8. H-ARQ feedback

6. Deployment, Interworking, and Beyond Release 9 6.1. Interworking with non-HSPA 6.2. HSPA+ Rel 8 and 9

enhancements 6.2.1. Multicarrier aggregation 6.2.2. MIMO and Dual Cell 6.2.3. Dual Cell HSUPA 6.2.4. UL L2 enhancements 6.2.5. CS speech using HSPA 6.2.6. HSPA VoIP WCDMA/GSM

CS Continuity 6.2.7. Beyond Release 9

Page 93: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

90 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

Mastering UMTS Core Networks (R99 to R7) Instructor Led | Duration: 3 Days | Course Number: UMTS302

UMTS (WCDMA), an evolution of GSM and GPRS, created a platform to converge the worlds of speech, data services and the Internet, to create a global market for mobile multimedia. This course contains an overview of the evolved core networks in different releases of UMTS from Release 4 to Release 7. Release 4 is considered a stepping stone to an All-IP network with a separation of the MSC into an MSC-server and a media gateway. An overview of UMTS and its vision for the next generation all-IP multimedia networks known as IP Multimedia Subsystems (IMS) and the various concepts used in IMS architecture, functions, components and interfaces are covered. Enabling technologies such as SIP, MEGACO and IPv6 and the use of these technologies within the IMS architecture will be studied. A discussion of Quality of Service (QoS) follows, with a presentation of key protocols and the scenarios associated with QoS. Intended Audience This course is intended for those in design, development, engineering and product management on UMTS core networks. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Identify the driving forces, requirements and goals of the • UMTS evolved core networks • Describe the building blocks used to construct Release 5 • List the functions of the UMTS Release 5, Release 6 and Release 7

architecture • Explain the signaling and transport protocols like SIP, BICC, Megaco

and RTP • Step through end-to-end service establishment flows in the Release

5, Release 6 and Release 7 architectures • Explain the scenarios that illustrate interworking with the PSTN and

legacy wireless networks • Identify various services that are supported in Release 6 • Describe how session border controller enables access of a

common IMS network with different access technologies like cdma2000, WiMAX, etc.

• Explain Voice Call Continuity (VCC) which enables an IMS subscriber on a VoIP call to continue the call into a circuit switched environment

• Describe reduction of latency in Release 7 with a simplified architecture

Suggested Prerequisites

• Exploring UMTS (WCDMA) (Instructor Led)

Course Outline 1. R99 UMTS Architecture

1.1. UMTS network architecture 1.2. UMTS releases and their goals 1.3. UMTS circuit and packet switched

domains 2. R4 Bearer Independent CS Core

Network 2.1. Motivation of Release 4 2.2. Reference architecture 2.3. Signaling and transport

3. R5 IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) Architecture 3.1. Motivation for Release 5 3.2. Architecture, components and

functions 3.3. Interfaces and protocols

4. IMS Signaling and Transport Protocols 4.1. SIP, SDP and MEGACO 4.2. Use of SIP and MEGACO in UMTS 4.3. RTP and RTCP

5. IMS Scenarios 5.1. Registration 5.2. Call origination and termination 5.3. Roaming and handovers 5.4. PSTN and UMTS IMS

6. Quality of Service 6.1. QoS techniques (IntServ, DiffServ) 6.2. End-to-end QoS architecture 6.3. QoS allocation scenarios

7. Services Architecture

7.1. Services architecture and role of application servers

7.2. Subscriber profiles and triggers 8. R6 Enhancements to IMS

8.1. New services 8.2. Group management 8.3. QoS enhancements 8.4. Session border controller

9. R7 One Tunnel Architecture 9.1. Different options 9.2. Interface changes 9.3. Scenarios

10. Voice Call Continuity 10.1. Architecture 10.2. Scenarios

Page 94: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

91© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.1

Mastering UMTS Radio Protocols and Signaling Instructor Led | Duration: 4 Days | Course Number: UMTS303

This course covers all the key aspects of the UMTS (WCDMA) Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN) – as deployed by major wireless operators and provides the details of the UTRAN architecture, protocols, operations and services. The signaling protocols and physical layer functions are introduced through following the end-to-end messaging of signaling initiation and a voice call. Details of power control and mobility are presented followed by packet data scenarios that introduce the protocols (e.g., MAC, RLC), transport format sets and the basics of radio resource management. The final chapters include an overview of RF design and introduction to HSPA. The approach of using end-to-end scenarios shows the application of concepts and the theory behind the concepts. In addition to review questions for each chapter, many of the in-depth chapters have classroom exercises that examine real world drive test logs. Intended Audience This course is primarily intended for a technical audience, including those in RF engineering, systems engineering, network engineering, product support, operations, and anyone seeking a more in-depth understanding of the UMTS RAN. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Identify the role of the UTRAN in delivering UMTS (WCDMA) services • List the components of the UTRAN and their roles and

responsibilities • Describe the roles of control plane protocols (RANAP, RNSAP, NBAP,

and RRC) • Identify Uu and Iu interface messages • Specify the physical layer functions and procedures managed by the

UTRAN • Define the details of system acquisition, initialization and

authentication of the UE • Explain the functions and procedures of logical, transport and

physical channels • Step through various handover scenarios including inter-radio

access technology (UMTS to GSM) • Highlight the procedures that support intra- and inter-UTRAN

mobility • Explain the steps of setting up and maintaining an RRC connection • Explain the evolution of UMTS to HSDPA/HSUPA

Suggested Prerequisites

• Exploring UMTS (WCDMA) (Instructor Led)

Course Outline 1. Introduction

1.1. UMTS architecture 1.2. UMTS Quality of Service (QoS)

2. UMTS Architecture 2.1. Access and non-access stratums 2.2. Core networks 2.3. UTRAN 2.4. RANAP

3. WCDMA in UMTS 3.1. Comparison of technologies 3.2. Spread Spectrum techniques 3.3. Channelization and scrambling codes 3.4. Power control 3.5. Handover and reselection

4. WCDMA Channels Overview 4.1. Air interface channel structure 4.2. Modulation

5. Network Perspective 5.1. Minimum set of channels 5.2. System acquisition 5.3. Random access

6. RRC Setup 6.1. RRC setup procedure 6.2. E911 redirect

7. Voice Call Setup 7.1. Paging 7.2. Authentication and security 7.3. Transport channel combinations 7.4. DPDCH/DPCCH structure

8. WCDMA Power Control

8.1. Key RF terms 8.2. Power control

9. Mobility - Intra-Frequency 9.1. Mobility while Idle 9.2. Mobility while connected 9.3. Soft and softer handover 9.4. SRNS relocation

10. Data Session Setup 10.1. UMTS attach 10.2. RLC protocol 10.3. MAC protocol 10.4. Data call setup 10.5. PDCP protocol 10.6. GTP protocol

11. Mobility - Inter-Frequency and Inter-RAT

11.1. Compressed mode 11.2. Handovers: Inter-frequency 11.3. Handovers: UMTS to GSM 11.4. Packet-switched Inter-RAT

handovers 12. RF Design, Analysis and

Optimization 12.1. UL and DL capacity for the link

budget 13. HSPA Essentials

13.1. HSDPA 13.2. HSUPA

Page 95: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

92 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v2.0

Mastering HSPA Protocols and Signaling Instructor Led | Duration: 3 Days | Course Number: UMTS304

High Speed Packet Access (HSPA) enhances the packet data services provided in UMTS (WCDMA) by increasing the data throughput and reducing delays. The HSPA network offers UMTS subscribers much higher data rates, in both the uplink and downlink. HSPA has three key technology enhancements: link adaptation using adaptive coding and modulation, incremental redundancy and fast scheduling. This course describes the key benefits and challenges of the HSPA technology and the enhancements to the signaling protocols to support HSPA. The focus is primarily on the radio network with emphasis is placed on the new channels and related operations. The overall operations of HSPA, starting from measurements and ending with HARQ, are addressed in detail. The key concepts in the course are tied together with several scenarios that offer insight into the reconfiguration of the radio link and mobility. Intended Audience This course is primarily intended for a technical audience, including those in RF engineering, systems engineering, network engineering, product support, operations, and anyone seeking a more in depth understanding of the HSPA. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• List the driving forces behind HSPA • Describe the key technological enhancements • Sketch the network architecture, related protocols and messaging

architectures of HSDPA/HSUPA networks • Explain how incremental redundancy will be used to improve the

retransmissions mechanisms in both the downlink and the uplink • Describe how the fast scheduling functions will reduce the delays

associated with sending packet data to the end users • Step through the establishment of a packet data session and

reconfiguration of the radio link • Identify the signaling enhancements required to set up an HSPA-

based data call • Describe the detailed operations of HSDPA such as CQI

determination, DL scheduling and HARQ operation • Describe the detailed operations of HSUPA such as grant

assignments, E-TFC selection and HARQ operation • Step through various handover scenarios including inter-radio

access technology (HSDPA/HSUPA to R99 to GPRS) • Sketch the message flow of a multi-service scenario

Suggested Prerequisites

• Mastering UMTS Radio Protocols and Signaling (Instructor Led)

Course Outline 1. Overview of HSPA (HSDPA + HSUPA)

1.1. HSPA goals 1.2. HSPA approach

2. HSDPA Basics 2.1. HSDPA in the UTRAN 2.2. HSDPA channels 2.3. HSDPA strategies

3. HSDPA Channels 3.1. High speed channel usage 3.2. HS-DPCCH, CQI and H-ARQ 3.3. HS-DSCH and HS-SCCH 3.4. HSDPA UE categories

4. HSDPA Traffic Operations 4.1. HSDPA data transmission overview 4.2. CQI reporting 4.3. Node B DL scheduling 4.4. Data transmission and control 4.5. H-ARQ – UE to Node B

5. HSDPA Data Call Signaling 5.1. RRC connection 5.2. PDP context activation 5.3. Radio bearer setup 5.4. Handover and sector switching

6. HSUPA Basics 6.1. HSUPA in the UTRAN 6.2. HSUPA channels 6.3. HSUPA strategies

7. HSUPA Channels

7.1. Enhanced channel usage 7.2. UL channels (E-DCH and E-DPCCH) 7.3. DL channels (E-AGCH, E-RGCH and

E-HICH) 7.4. HSUPA UE categories

8. HSUPA Traffic Operations 8.1. HSDPA data transmission overview 8.2. Scheduling request 8.3. Uplink scheduling at Node B 8.4. Grant allocation 8.5. Data transmission and control 8.6. H-ARQ – Node B to UE

9. HSUPA Data Call Signaling 9.1. RRC connection 9.2. Radio bearer setup 9.3. HSUPA parameter assignments 9.4. Absolute and relative grants 9.5. Handover and sector switching

10. Multi-Services Scenario 10.1. Establish a multi-service

connection 10.2. Release a multi-service connection

11. HSPA Interworking 11.1. HSPA - UMTS handover 11.2. HSPA – GPRS/EDGE handover

Page 96: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

93© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.1

HSPA+ Protocols and Signaling (R7, R8 & R9) Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: UMTS205

This course provides a fundamental understanding of HSPA+ protocols and signaling features defined in Release 7 up to Release 9. HSPA+ refers to the enhancements of the basic HSPA operation defined for Release 5 HSDPA and Release 6 HSUPA. HSPA+ focuses on layer one and layer two to improve the maximum data rate and to minimize the overhead for real-time sensitive services. The course first gives an overview of the main HSPA+ features and changes to the protocols and architecture. The signaling enhancements to the data session establishment procedures are then covered in detail along with providing details of session setup as well as mobility related signaling procedures for HSPA+. Focus then moves to key enhancements to support real-time services such as VoIP and associated QoS. The course concludes with a discussion of the key interworking topics between HSPA+ and 2.5G, other 3G, and 4G networks. Intended Audience This course is designed for service provider personnel involved in network planning, design, deployment, integration and operations. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• List key HSPA+ features and the associated benefits • Identify the impact of HSPA+ on the network and the UE • Sketch the protocol reference model and key changes from HSPA • Explain new RRC connection establishment procedures • Identify the impact of HSPA+ on paging and mobility • Explain the impact of MIMO on data transfer • Sketch the data session establishment procedure for a high speed

connection • Show how HSPA+ supports VoIP and associated QoS • Illustrate the basic steps of DL and UL data transfer • List key messages and parameters for HSPA+ operations • Show how HSPA+ interworks with other technologies such as

GSM/GPRS, UMTS/HSPA and LTE Suggested Prerequisites

• Mastering HSPA Protocols and Signaling (Instructor Led) • HSPA+ Overview (R7) (eLearning)

Course Outline 1. HSPA+ Overview

1.1. Evolution of UMTS (R99 to R9) 1.2. HSPA+: Promises and challenges 1.3. Summary of key HSPA+ features and

associated benefits 1.4. Impact of HSPA+ on UE and network

1.4.1. Network upgrades 1.4.2. UE categories and upgrades

2. HSPA Architecture/Protocols 2.1. Physical, MAC, RLC and RRC 2.2. HSPA+ channels

3. Signaling Enhancements for Key Features 3.1. Key messages and parameters for

throughput enhancements 3.1.1. High-Order Modulation (HOM) 3.1.2. MIMO and transmit diversity 3.1.3. Layer 2 RLC/MAC 3.1.4. Dual Cell Signaling 3.1.5. F-DPCH enhancements

3.2. Key messages and parameters for reduction in latency and power 3.2.1. DTX/DRX 3.2.2. Enhanced CELL_FACH

4. Call Setup Signaling 4.1. RRC connection setup

enhancements 4.2. Radio bearer setup enhancements 4.3. HSDPA channel assignments 4.4. HSUPA channel assignments 4.5. HSPA+ configuration

5. Paging Procedures Mobility Management Signaling 5.1. Mobility management (active and

idle)

5.2. Handover and sector switching 5.3. Paging procedures

6. Basic DL and UL Traffic Operations 6.1. Overall DL data transfer (with and

without MIMO) 6.1.1. Without HS-SCCH 6.1.2. With HS-SCCH

6.2. CPICH enhancements 6.3. CQI enhancements (CQI Types A

and B) 6.4. Overall UL data transfer

7. DL Traffic Operations with MIMO 7.1. Overall DL data transfer with

MIMO 7.2. CQI reporting 7.3. Node B scheduler

8. VoIP in HSPA+ 8.1. Benefits of VoIP on HSPA+ 8.2. CS Voice over HSPA 8.3. HSPA+ enhancements for VoIP 8.4. End-to-end call setup

8.4.1. Configuration for VoIP 8.5. QoS in HSPA+ 8.6. Mobility scenarios (PS to CS)

9. Signaling for HSPA+ Interworking 9.1. Carrier sharing vs. Multiple

carriers 9.2. Interworking

9.2.1. 2.5G 9.2.2. HSPA 9.2.3. LTE 9.2.4. Centralized architecture 9.2.5. Direct tunnel architecture

Page 97: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

94 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.1

Multi-Carrier HSPA+ (R8 & R9) Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day

This course provides a fundamental understanding of HSPA+ features defined in Release 8 and Release 9. Multi-Carrier HSPA+ refers to the enhancements of the basic HSPA+ operation defined for Release 7 HSDPA and HSUPA. Multi-Carrier HSPA+ focuses on the air interface to further improve spectral efficiency. The course first gives an overview of the main HSPA+ features and associated benefits. Once the overview is given, details of the features are discussed. First, the throughput-enhancing features and features that help lower latency and/or UE power consumption are discussed. Then, overall call setup process is illustrated with a focus on Multi-Carrier HSPA+ configuration. Details of the data transfer in the DL and the UL with a focus on radio signaling is given. Finally Mobility and deployment scenarios are discussed. Intended Audience This course is designed for those involved in the design, deployment, operation, and optimization of HSPA+ networks. It is suitable for planners and engineers responsible for network planning, design and deployment, integration and network operations. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• List main HSPA+ features and the associated benefits in R7 • Identify HSPA+ enhancements introduced in R8 and R9 • Identify the impact of R8 and R9 HSPA+ on the network and the UE • Describe the details of Multi-Carrier operation and signaling in R8

and R9 • Summarize the UE configurations and UE categories with respect to

Multi-carrier operation in HSPA+ • Illustrate the basic steps of DL and UL data transfer • Illustrate the measurement and handover procedures in Dual

Carrier cells • List deployment scenarios and the associated challenges

Suggested Prerequisites

• Mastering HSPA Protocols and Signaling (Instructor Led) • HSPA+ Overview (R7) (eLearning) • Exploring HSPA+ (Instructor Led)

Course Outline 1. HSPA+ Overview

1.1. Evolution of UMTS (R99 to R9) 1.2. HSPA+: Promises and challenges 1.3. Summary of key HSPA+ features and

associated benefits for R7, R8 & R9 1.3.1. Multi-carrier HSPA+ 1.3.2. Spectrum aggregation 1.3.3. Multiple antenna techniques 1.3.4. High-Order Modulation in DL 1.3.5. Enhanced serving cell change 1.3.6. Enhanced CELL_FACH 1.3.7. L2 enhancements 1.3.8. Direct tunnel architecture

1.4. Impact of R8 & R9 HSPA+ on UE and network 1.4.1. Network upgrades 1.4.2. UE categories and upgrades

2. Basic DL and UL Traffic Operations 2.1. Overall UL/ DL data transfer

2.1.1. With and without MIMO 2.1.2. With Dual Carrier 2.1.3. With and without HS-SCCH

2.2. CQI reporting 2.3. Node B scheduler 2.4. HS-SCCH signaling 2.5. Retrieval of a DL packet from HS-

DSCH 2.6. H-ARQ feedback 2.7. UL data transfer operations

3. Call Setup

3.1. Call setup signaling 3.2. HSPA+ configuration 3.3. Signaling for multi-carrier

operations in the UL and DL 4. Mobility Management

4.1. Mobility management (active and idle) in DC-HSPA

4.2. Measurement control for Dual Carrier operation

4.3. UE Measurement reporting for Dual Carrier operation

4.4. Enhanced serving cell change 4.5. Handovers in Dual Carrier

scenarios

5. Deployment, Interworking and Beyond Release 9 5.1. Deployment challenges 5.2. Carrier sharing vs. multiple carriers 5.3. Deployment scenarios 5.4. Voice Call Continuity with

WCDMA/GSM 5.5. Interworking with 2.5G, HSPA and

LTE 5.6. HSPA+ Release 10 enhancements 5.7. Performance aspects in Dual

Carrier operations

Page 98: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

95© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

IMS in UMTS (R8) Networks Instructor Led | Average Duration: 3 Days

UMTS (WCDMA) creates a platform to converge the different worlds of voice and data services to create a global market for mobile multimedia. This course is intended for those seeking an overview of UMTS’ vision for the next generation All-IP multimedia networks known as IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS). This course provides an overview of the various concepts used in IMS architecture, functions, components and interfaces. Enabling technologies such as SIP, MEGACO and IPv6 and the use of these technologies within the IMS architecture will be studied. A discussion of Quality of Service (QoS) follows, with a presentation of key protocols and the scenarios associated with QoS. Single Radio Voice Call Continuity between IMS and a circuit switched environment will be studied. Intended Audience This course is intended to provide a technical overview of the IMS. It is appropriate for all technical personnel as well as those in product management, technical sales, planning, architecture, design, deployment and support. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• List the motivation, benefits and challenges with IMS in UMTS • Sketch IMS network architecture in relation to UMTS • List the functions of the key components in IMS • Explain functions of key protocols such as SIP, Megaco, and RTP • Describe basic IMS operations over a UMTS network • Explain how a UMTS subscriber makes an IMS call • Explain how IMS enables dynamic Quality of Service (QoS) in UMTS • Explain how IMS provides a service delivery platform • Discuss the IMS security architecture • Describe the IMS interconnection strategy • Explain how IMS is being used to provide service continuity between

different access networks • Depict scenarios that illustrate interworking with the PSTN • Sketch the IMS charging architecture

Suggested Prerequisites

• IP Convergence Essentials (Instructor Led) • Overview of IMS (eLearning) • Overview of UMTS (eLearning)

Course Outline 1. Introduction

1.1. The IP convergence big picture 1.2. Motivation and benefits of IMS in

UMTS 2. UMTS PS Core Network Overview

2.1. Reference architecture 2.2. Operations

2.2.1. Attach to the network 2.2.2. Set up a session

3. SIP Overview 3.1. Reference architecture 3.2. Operations

4. IMS Architecture 4.1. Reference architecture 4.2. Components and functions 4.3. CSCF, HSS, MGCF, MGW, etc.

5. IMS Signaling Protocols 5.1. IMS core network interfaces 5.2. IMS SIP 5.3. Diameter 5.4. Media protocols – H.248, RTP, RTCP

6. IMS Basic Operations - Registration 6.1. Overview 6.2. Discovery and selection of nodes 6.3. Authentication

7. IMS Basic Operations – Call Scenario 7.1. Overview 7.2. Media and QoS negotiation 7.3. Interworking with PSTN

8. IMS QoS

8.1. 3GPP policy and charging control 8.2. QoS flow example

9. IMS Services 9.1. IMS application server

architecture 9.2. End to end applications 9.3. Network based applications 9.4. Media server interactions 9.5. Service configuration (XCAP)

10. IMS Security 10.1. Key security challenges 10.2. Signaling and media protection 10.3. NAT/firewall traversal

11. Interconnection 11.1. IBCF 11.2. IPv6/IPv4 11.3. IMS SIP to Non-IMS SIP 11.4. IMS SIP to Non-SIP

12. IMS Mobility 12.1. IMS Centralized Services (ICS) 12.2. IMS Service Continuity (ISC) 12.3. SRVCC

13. Charging 13.1. Charging architecture 13.2. Offline charging 13.3. Online charging

Page 99: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

96 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

3GPP Packet Core Networks (R99 to R8) Instructor Led | Duration: 3 Days

The UMTS core network was created to support the increasing demand for wireless voice and data traffic. As data usage increases, there is a growing need for operators to be able to understand more detail about data usage patterns in their network. This course provides an overview of the 3GPP core network as it has evolved from UMTS Release 99 through the LTE Evolved Packet Core (Release 8). It explores the 3GPP services architecture (IP Multimedia Subsystem, or IMS) and the various concepts used in IMS architecture, functions, components and interfaces. The course also covers key topics such as PCC, QoS, and interoperability between UMTS and LTE as well as implementation of Femto Cells (Home NodeB), and the emerging area of local internet breakout. We take an end to end view of the network and explain practical implementations of services such as enterprise connectivity, email connectivity, voice using IMS, etc. The course covers various aspects of mobility management for both UMTS and LTE networks.

Intended Audience This course is intended for those in design, development, engineering and product management on UMTS core networks. Learning Objectives After completing this workshop, the student will be able to:

• Sketch the 3GPP Core Network architecture for R99-R8 • Describe key steps in the 3GPP evolution from 2G through 4G • List key features of the 3GPP packet data releases (R99 through

R8) • Sketch an end-to-end call and data session setup for UMTS/HSPA • Explain various roaming scenarios and the role of GRX & IPX • Sketch how UMTS/LTE use Ethernet backhaul and IP/MPLS • Sketch how popular data services such as email and private IP

access are implemented over UMTS/HSPA networks • Describe UMTS/LTE data mobility in light of 1xEV-DO and WiMAX • Explain the function of key protocols like SIP, BICC, and RTP • Sketch end-to-end IMS-based service call flows for VoIP and SMS • Illustrate how QoS is allocated end-to-end • Illustrate IMS interworking with the PSTN and legacy wireless • Describe the function and application of PCC

Suggested Prerequisites

• UMTS Mobility (eLearning) • Overview of IMS (eLearning) • LTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Overview (eLearning)

Course Outline 1. Setting the Stage

1.1. Industry direction 1.2. IP convergence

2. Wireless Network Evolution 2.1. 3GPP evolution: GSM to LTE 2.2. Mobile services

3. UMTS/HSPA Networks Overview 3.1. UMTS transport network 3.2. UMTS core networks

4. UMTS Packet Data Operations 4.1. Wireless Internet over UMTS

5. Mobility Management in UMTS 5.1. Mobility management functions 5.2. Idle state mobility 5.3. Connected state mobility 5.4. Soft handover 5.5. RNC/core network-based handovers 5.6. GPRS roaming exchange

6. Data Services Over Wireless 6.1. Email solutions 6.2. VPN access to enterprise networks

7. 3GPP Femtocells and Local Breakout 7.1. Architectures 7.2. Femto operations 7.3. Local breakout operations

8. Policy Charging and Control (PCC) 8.1. Architectures 8.2. Diameter PCC profile 8.3. Operations

9. LTE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) 9.1. Architecture 9.2. EPC network nodes

10. LTE EPC Operations 10.1. Registration 10.2. Default and dedicated bearer 10.3. Mobility

10.3.1. Idle mode and mobility 10.3.2. Intra-MME mobility 10.3.3. Inter-MME mobility

10.4. Interworking 10.4.1. Interworking with 3GPP 10.4.2. Interworking with non-

3GPP 11. Quality of Service

11.1. QoS in UMTS networks 11.2. End-to-end QoS UMTS IMS

configuration 11.3. QoS enhancements for LTE

networks 12. IMS Architecture

12.1. Session management components

12.2. Database components 12.3. Interworking components 12.4. Services components

13. IMS Scenarios 13.1. Registration 13.2. VoIP origination 13.3. IMS interworking 13.4. Supporting SMS in LTE 13.5. IMS roaming

Page 100: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

97© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.1

UMTS/HSPA/HSPA+ Air Interface Instructor Led | Duration: 3 Days | Course Number: UMTS306

The Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS), High Speed Packet Access (HSPA) and its extension HSPA+ belong to the third generation family of 3GPP technologies. In UMTS, the air interface was designed to support bidirectional 2 Mbps, Quality of Service (QoS), security and concurrent circuit-switched and packet-switched services. Riding the wave of successful GSM/GPRS networks, the quest for better user experience was realized in UMTS with the advent of HSPA and eventually HSPA+. This course provides the details of the Layer 1, 2 and 3 procedures and technology features in UMTS, HSPA and HSPA+, taking a handset-centric view. Intended Audience This course is intended for those seeking a detailed understanding of the UMTS, HSPA and HSPA+ air interface. This includes those in a design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering, network engineering, or verification role. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Describe UMTS, HSPA and HSPA+ technologies and their performance goals, and the details of strategies used to achieve these goals

• Sketch the complete protocol structure of a User Equipment (UE) with emphasis on lower layers (L1, L2 and L3)

• Explain channel and frame structures in UMTS, HSPA and HSPA+ • Describe air interface operations for UMTS, HSPA and HSPA+ such

as channel coding, transport channel processing, modulation and coding

• List the Layer 1, 2 and 3 features such as AMR, power control and mobile-assisted handovers

• Describe the modulation and coding schemes in UMTS, HSPA and HSPA+

• Explain how link adaptation is performed in UMTS, HSPA and HSPA+

Suggested Prerequisites • UMTS/WCDMA Air Interface Fundamentals (eLearning)

Complementary Courses

• HSDPA (R5) (eLearning) • HSUPA (R6) (eLearning) • HSPA+ Overview (R7) (eLearning)

Course Outline 1. Introduction to UMTS

1.1. Motivation for UMTS 1.2. UMTS architecture 1.3. UTRAN nodes and interfaces 1.4. Roadmap to HSPA+ R10

2. UMTS (WCDMA) Air Interface 2.1. Spread spectrum technique 2.2. Channelization and scrambling codes 2.3. Spreading and modulation 2.4. Soft handover and RAKE receiver 2.5. UMTS radio frame structure

3. Channels in UMTS 3.1. Radio protocol stack in UMTS 3.2. Logical, transport and physical

channels concepts 3.3. Transport channel processing (AMR

as an example) 3.4. Channel mapping and multiplexing

4. Physical Layer Operations 4.1. Introduction – Life of a UE 4.2. Cell synchronization and network

acquisition 4.3. RRC connection and states 4.4. Registration, security and the radio

access bearer concept 4.5. Cell selection and reselection 4.6. UE measurements 4.7. UE power control 4.8. Compressed mode and inter-system

measurements 4.9. Mobility in UMTS (soft/softer/hard

handovers)

5. Overview of HSPA 5.1. HSPA goals 5.2. Air interface strategies 5.3. Impact of HSPA on radio network 5.4. UE categories

6. Key Concepts of HSPA 6.1. Adaptive modulation and coding 6.2. Fast scheduling at the Node B 6.3. UE measurement and feedback 6.4. H-ARQ and incremental

redundancy 7. HSPA Channel Enhancements

7.1. HSPA protocol stack modifications

7.2. HSDPA UL/DL channel details 7.3. HSUPA UL/DL channel details

8. HSPA Traffic Operations 8.1. HSDPA

8.1.1. Channel quality indicator 8.1.2. HS-SCCH operational

details 8.1.3. Hard handovers

8.2. HSUPA 8.2.1. Uplink resource allocation 8.2.2. Absolute and relative grants 8.2.3. Soft handovers

9. HSPA+ 9.1. Impact of HSPA+ on radio

network and protocol stacks 9.2. Key concepts of HSPA+ 9.3. Downlink data transmission 9.4. Uplink data transmission 9.5. MIMO in HSPA+

Page 101: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

98 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.4

UMTS/HSPA (WCDMA) RF Design Mentoring Instructor Led | Duration: 5 Days Onsite | Course Number: UMTS401

The goal of this program is to equip RF engineers to perform UMTS RF network design by mentoring them using real world data as they develop the required skills. The first part of the program covers the radio network planning and design aspects of a UMTS network. It describes the process of mapping the service and market requirements to RF system parameters and walks through the link budget calculations. The program discusses cell planning aspects, the use of existing infrastructure, overlay configurations, backhaul capacity planning as well as growth considerations. The second part of the program consists of mentoring sessions to reinforce the key learning points by allowing the participants to utilize national design guidelines, site and market data, and design tools selected by the local market to perform RF design tasks and obtain hands-on experience. Like other mentoring programs from Award Solutions, this program uses tools, processes and real data for the service provider’s network.

Intended Audience This course is intended for UMTS RF design engineers and RF performance engineers who want to learn UMTS RF design. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Step through the process of wireless network design • List the source of interference and ways to overcome it in typical

radio networks • Discuss the selection of antenna and TTLNA, and antenna sharing

with 2G • Determine the link budget for a UMTS system • Inter-frequency handover impacts and planning • Describe the impact of operating frequency spectrum and

bandwidth, as well as the required guard band • Discuss various scrambling code planning considerations • Discuss neighbor list planning considerations • Design the radio network based on capacity, coverage and quality

requirements • Calculate the capacity for the cell site, RNC, and backhaul needs

and plan for future growth • Compare and evaluate different network design options • Apply selected tools and processes more efficiently • Analyze network economics for different design choices

Suggested Prerequisites

• Mastering UMTS Radio Protocols and Signaling (Instructor Led) • Mastering HSPA Protocols and Signaling (Instructor Led)

Special Note Market-specific tools and configuration data are needed three weeks prior to the class to deliver maximum value for the attendees.

Course Outline 1. Introduction to UMTS System Design

1.1. Process of wireless network design and deployment

1.2. UMTS network requirements 2. UMTS Air Interface

2.1. WCDMA 2.2. HSPA 2.3. IFHO/IRAT 2.4. Design KPIs

3. UMTS/HSPA System Planning Considerations 3.1. Impacts of operating frequency 3.2. Scrambling code planning 3.3. Parameter settings

4. System Planning Exercise 4.1. Frequency considerations 4.2. Parameter planning 4.3. Coverage goals 4.4. Capacity goals

5. Antenna Considerations 5.1. Antenna selection 5.2. Antenna sharing 5.3. Diversity techniques of UMTS

6. Link Budget for UMTS/HSPA 6.1. System parameter considerations 6.2. Maximum allowable path loss for UL

and DL

7. Link Budget Exercise

7.1. Uplink 7.2. Downlink 7.3. Options and balancing

8. UMTS RF Design 8.1. Market, radio and service

requirements 8.2. RF design process and options 8.3. Propagation models 8.4. Site configurations

9. Coverage Design Exercises 9.1. Overlay design 9.2. IFHO/IRAT planning

10. UMTS Network Capacity Planning 10.1. Cell site capacity planning 10.2. Capacity design 10.3. Capacity optimization 10.4. Backhaul capacity planning

11. Capacity Exercises 11.1. Capacity design 11.2. Capacity optimization

12. Cell Planning Considerations 12.1. Site selection tradeoffs 12.2. Site selection process 12.3. Neighbor list planning

13. Site Shakedown and Acceptance 13.1. Site acceptance 13.2. Cluster acceptance

Page 102: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

99© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.9

UMTS (WCDMA) RF Optimization Mentoring (1 of 2) Instructor Led | Duration: 5 Days (Workshop 1) | Course Number: UMTS402

UMTS allows operators to offer higher data rates and more capacity in their networks. This unique mentoring workshop delves deep into the behavior of UMTS in real-world environments, providing insights into the symptoms and possible causes of field performance issues. UMTS RF Optimization Mentoring is divided into two instructor led sessions that include all aspects of UMTS. The first workshop allows participants to gain in-depth knowledge of the subjects of coverage and containment, neighbor list tuning, access, and dropped calls. This knowledge transfer is obtained by allowing participants to gain hands-on experience using market specific tools, drive data, counters, and vendor OSS tools. During the coverage and neighbor list tuning section, the students will use market-specific post processing tools to analyze scanner data and to identify coverage and neighbor issues. Intended Audience This in-depth mentoring program is intended for wireless network operators, particularly RF professionals involved in cell planning and design, system design, RF engineering, and RF mentoring. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Utilize multiple RF coverage plots to assess coverage and containment issues, using market specific tools (e.g. Actix and MapInfo)

• Identify and prioritize coverage issues (i.e. polluting cells) and suggest corrective actions using market propagation tools

• Understand vendor specific neighbor list algorithms • Uncover neighbor list issues using drive test post processing tools,

as well as vendor’s OSS tools • Explain the random access and call setup procedures and list

vendor specific parameters affecting access performance • Identify and troubleshoot access failures and dropped calls using

market specific post processing tools • Utilize vendor OSS tools (e.g. UE and cell traces, event data, and

reported measurements), as well system counters; to target cells with potential performance issues and troubleshoot the root cause of access failures and dropped calls, and suggest corrective actions

Suggested Prerequisites

• Vendor training as appropriate • Mastering UMTS Radio Protocols and Signaling (Instructor Led) • Mastering HSPA Protocols and Signaling (Instructor Led)

Special Note Market-specific network, configuration data, as well as statistical reports are needed three weeks prior to the course to deliver maximum value for the attendees.

Workshop 1 Session Outline 1. Introduction to UMTS Optimization

1.1. Optimization overview 1.2. KPI Summary 1.3. Optimization methodology 1.4. Tools available for optimization 1.5. Physical layer processing overview 1.6. WCDMA measurement overview

2. RF Coverage and Containment 2.1. Defining the “right” coverage 2.2. Key plots for assessing coverage 2.3. Pilot pollution analysis 2.4. Coverage analysis 2.5. Workshop using MapInfo 2.6. Workshop using post processing tool 2.7. Workshop using propagation tool

3. Neighbor List Tuning 3.1. WCDMA versus GSM NL strategies 3.2. Rules for NL selection 3.3. Scanner based NL tuning techniques 3.4. Vendor specific algorithms 3.5. Workshop using market specified

tool 3.6. Workshop using OSS tools

4. Access Performance

4.1. Call setup overview 4.2. Sources of access failures 4.3. Random access procedure 4.4. Parameters related to access 4.5. Workshop using post processing

tool 4.6. Workshop using OSS tools 4.7. Workshop using counters

5. Dropped Calls and Call Quality 5.1. Dedicated channel operations 5.2. Sources of dropped calls 5.3. Soft handover parameters 5.4. UL versus DL drops 5.5. BLER analysis (UL and DL) 5.6. Workshop using post processing

tool 5.7. Workshop using OSS tools 5.8. Workshop using counters

Page 103: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

100 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.9

UMTS (WCDMA) RF Optimization Mentoring (2 of 2) Instructor Led | Duration: 5 Days (Workshop 2) | Course Number: UMTS402

UMTS allows operators to provide higher data rates and more capacity in their networks. This unique mentoring workshop delves deep into the behavior of UMTS in real-world environments, providing insights into the symptoms and possible causes of field performance issues. UMTS RF Optimization Mentoring is divided into two instructor led sessions, which include all aspects of UMTS. This second workshop allows the participants to gain in-depth knowledge of the R99 and HSPA packet-switched (PS) data. This knowledge transfer is obtained by allowing participants to gain hands-on experience using market-specific tools, drive data, counters, and vendor OSS tools. During the R99 and HSPA PS modules, the students will gain a practical understanding of the vendor’s algorithms, parameters and counters related to R99 PS channel switching, HSDPA, and HSUPA.

Intended Audience This in-depth mentoring program is intended for wireless network operators, particularly RF professionals involved in cell planning and design, system design, RF engineering, and RF mentoring. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Describe vendor-specific algorithms related to R99 packet-switched data (e.g., channel switching, and state changes)

• Utilize market-specific tools to plots throughput, and assess coverage and containment issues affecting packet-switched performance

• Discuss HSDPA and HSUPA technology, and be familiar with vendor-specific implementation

• Evaluate network statistics (counters) to assess cell throughput performance, shared resource utilization, as well as target cells with potential performance issues

• Identify HSDPA and HSUPA performance issues related to RF coverage using market-specific post processing tools

• Corroborate RF issues with a market propagation tool and recommend corrective action

• Utilize vendor OSS tools (e.g., UE and cell traces, event data, and reported measurements) to troubleshoot the root cause of packet-switched performance issues, and suggest corrective actions

Suggested Prerequisites

• Vendor training as appropriate • Mastering UMTS Radio Protocols and Signaling (Instructor Led) • Mastering HSPA Protocols and Signaling (Instructor Led) • UMTS (WCDMA) RF Optimization Mentoring Workshop 1 (Instructor Led)

Special Note Market-specific network, configuration data, as well as statistical reports are needed three weeks prior to the course to deliver maximum value for the attendees.

Workshop 2 Session Outline 6. Packet Switched Data Performance

6.1. Vendor specific R99 PS parameters 6.2. Vendor specific R99 PS algorithms 6.3. Throughput efficiency 6.4. Performance and capacity tradeoffs 6.5. Workshop using counters

7. HSDPA Technology and Performance 7.1. HSDPA overview 7.2. HSDPA performance issues 7.3. Key plots for assessing HSDPA

performance 7.4. Vendor specific parameters and

algorithms related to HSDPA 7.5. Workshop using post processing tool 7.6. Workshop using OSS tools 7.7. Workshop using counters

8. HSUPA Technology and Performance 8.1. HSUPA overview 8.2. HSUPA performance issues 8.3. Key plots for assessing HSUPA

performance 8.4. Vendor specific parameters and

algorithms related to HSUPA 8.5. Workshop using post processing tool 8.6. Workshop using OSS tools 8.7. Workshop using counters

9. Inter Frequency and IRAT

Handover 9.1. Idle/connected IFHO and IRAT

overview 9.2. Vendor specific Parameters and

Algorithms related to IFHO and IRAT

9.3. 2G and 3G core network issues 9.4. Performance impacts related to

parameters 9.5. Workshop using post processing

tool 9.6. Workshop using OSS tools 9.7. Workshop using counters

10. Radio Capacity Optimization 10.1. Overview of limited resources 10.2. Code vs. Power limited networks 10.3. Capacity versus quality impacts 10.4. Method for determining system

capacity 10.5. Soft Handover Factor analysis

using Vendor Specific counters 10.6. Workshop using vendor specific

reports, counters, and traces

Page 104: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

101© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

UMTS/HSPA+ RF Optimization Workshop Instructor Led | Duration: 4 Days (Intense workshop)

UMTS allows operators to provide higher data rates and more capacity in their networks. This customized mentoring workshop for performance engineers delves deep into the behavior of UMTS and HSPA+ in real-world environments, providing insights into the symptoms and possible causes of field performance issues. This advanced level workshop assumes that the participants to have in-depth knowledge in UMTS and HSPA+ technology, RF Coverage and Containment, and Neighbor List Tuning, This workshop focuses on Access issues, Dropped Calls, Soft handover issues, HSPA+ Packet Switched data, Inter Frequency Handover and Inter Radio Access Technology (IRAT) Handovers. This knowledge transfer is achieved by using actual market specific data and tools. Participants will gain hands on experience in analyzing their own market data using market specific tools, drive data, counters, and vendor OSS tools and data. The exercises in each of the key areas will allow the participant to gain experience using post processing tools, as well as counters to identify, troubleshoot, and determine the root cause for specific setup, failure and throughput issues.

Intended Audience This in-depth mentoring program is intended for wireless network operators, particularly RF/system performance engineers. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Identify the different counters that are pegged by vendor products at different stages in the call flow for circuit and packet switched services

• Use scanner and mobile drive plots to evaluate network coverage and interference levels

• Identify and troubleshoot access failures and dropped calls using market-specific counters, parameters and tools

• Understand the benefits and impacts of HSPA+ features • Describe HSPA+ data session setup and be familiar with the vendor-

specific implementations • Evaluate HSPA+ network statistics to assess throughput

performance and resource usage, and to identify potential problems • Describe the algorithms and parameters related to IRAT and IFHO,

and the effects of changing these parameters Required Prerequisites

• Very good knowledge of UMTS and HSPA+ signaling and technology • Familiar with vendor-specific tools, logs and counters • Able to use and analyze call logs, Excel spreadsheets and MapInfo

files as required for the in-class exercises Special Note Market-specific network logs, configuration data, as well as statistical reports are needed three weeks prior to the course to deliver maximum value for the attendees. Our Subject Matter Expert (SME) will analyze the market specific data to identify and develop examples and exercises for each performance area discussed in the workshop.

Workshop Session Outline 1. HSPA+ Performance Optimization

1.1. Optimization principles 1.2. Key Performance Indicators (KPIs)

2. RF Coverage and Neighbor Lists 2.1. RF measurements 2.2. Coverage optimization 2.3. Pilot pollution 2.4. RF coverage plots 2.5. Neighbor lists and composite

neighbor lists 2.6. In-class exercises

3. Access Performance 3.1. Voice call establishment 3.2. Random access process and

parameters 3.3. Accessibility KPIs 3.4. Access failure scenarios 3.5. In-class exercises

4. Dropped Calls and Call Quality 4.1. UL and DL synch 4.2. Retainability KPIs 4.3. Dropped call scenarios 4.4. In-class exercises

5. IFHO and IRAT Performance 5.1. Idle mode cell reselection 5.2. Compressed mode 5.3. IFHO and IRAT triggers

5.4. IFHO and IRAT handovers 5.5. In-class exercises

6. HSPA+ Downlink Performance 6.1. Packet call establishment 6.2. Packet data KPIs 6.3. RAB and state switching 6.4. Downlink operations 6.5. Code and power management 6.6. CQI 6.7. DL throughput optimization 6.8. In-class exercises

7. HSPA+ Uplink Performance 7.1. UL interference management 7.2. Uplink operations 7.3. UL throughput optimization 7.4. HSPA+ specific features 7.5. In-class exercises

8. UMTS/HSPA+ Technology Review 8.1. UTRAN architecture 8.2. Bearers and channels 8.3. Measurement control 8.4. Mobility 8.5. Power control

Page 105: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

102 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

Page 106: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

103© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

The wireless industry is continuing to go through a transition. It is important for individuals in the wireless industry and in the wireline industries to fully understand the fundamentals of wireless networks they are expected to design, deploy and support. Wireless network fundamentals require a solid foundation in 2G and 3G technologies, IP technologies, and the technologies that are enabling interactions between the wireless and traditional wireline technologies.

About the CurriculumAward Solutions has assembled a comprehensive curriculum suitable to both individuals new to the wireless industry as well as industry veterans who wish to learn more about wireless networks. The courses take students through the fundamentals.

Award Solutions’ Wireless Landscape curriculum offers a suite of courses in both eLearning and Instructor Led formats.

Self-paced eLearning CoursesWelcome to Wireless NetworksWelcome to GSM/GPRS1xEV-DO Networks (Rev 0)1xEV-DO Networks (Rev A)Overview of 3G Wireless NetworksOverview of WiMAX

Instructor Led CoursesExploring Wireless Landscape, IP Convergence, and 4GExploring Wireless Technologies and NetworksFundamentals of RF EngineeringExploring GSM/EGPRS/UMTS/HSPA/HSPA+GSM Performance Workshop1x and 1xEV-DO FundamentalsWireless and 3G/4G Basics

WirelessLandscape

Overview of 3G Wireless Networks eLearning Course

Page 107: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

104 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v3.0

Welcome to Wireless Networks eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour | Course Number: FUND104

Wireless communications have come a long way from early implementations to today’s wide offering of available services. This course provides an introductory overview of mobile wireless communication along with a brief history of the evolution of wireless communications from early systems to today’s capabilities. Fundamentals of mobile wireless networks and their functions are described. A high level description of mobile wireless services and their delivery to the mobile subscriber is also provided. Participants are not required to be technically oriented to benefit from this course. At the conclusion of this course, participants will have a familiarity with mobile wireless communications, the fundamental components of the network and their functions, as well as operations required to deliver basic service. Intended Audience This course is for participants who are new to the wireless industry or desire a general level understanding of wireless communications. Participants are not required to be technically oriented to benefit from this course. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Identify characteristics of wireless communications • List advantages of a wireless mobile system • Identify basic wireless network elements • List external networks and services • Identify challenges in providing a mobile radio network • Describe basic wireless service delivery

Complementary Courses

• Overview of GPRS (eLearning) • Exploring GSM (Instructor Led) • Exploring GPRS and EDGE (Instructor Led) • Exploring UMTS (WCDMA) (Instructor Led)

Knowledge Knuggets 1. Introduction 2. Wireless History

2.1. Characteristics of pre cellular radio telephony

2.2. Evolution of key cellular radio concepts

2.3. Characteristics of first generation wireless (1G)

2.4. Characteristics of second generation wireless (2G)

2.5. Characteristics of third Generation wireless (3G)

3. Wireless Fundamentals 3.1. Advantages of wireless mobile

systems 3.2. Wireless mobile network elements

and connections to external world 3.3. Transport media on a simple level

and role it plays in wireless 3.4. External networks/services to which

mobiles connect 3.5. Challenges and considerations in

providing a mobile radio network 3.6. Aspects of a mobile network carrier

4. Wireless Service Delivery 4.1. Steps involved in a mobile

registration 4.2. Steps involved in a typical voice call 4.3. Steps involved in a typical data call

Put It All Together Assess the knowledge of the participant based on the objectives of the course

Page 108: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

105© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v2.0

Welcome to GSM/GPRS eLearning | Average Duration: 1.5 hours | Course Number: GPRS101

Wireless communications have come a long way from early implementations to today’s wide offering of available services. This course provides a GSM and GPRS overview of mobile wireless communications. It presents a brief history of the progression of wireless communications from early systems to today’s capabilities. Mobile wireless networks, their elements and their functions are described. In addition, mobile wireless services and their delivery to the mobile subscriber are described. This course is intended for individuals who desire a general understanding of mobile wireless communications focused on GSM and GPRS. Participants are not required to be technically-oriented to benefit from this course. At the conclusion of this course, participants will be familiar with mobile wireless communications, the networks and their elements, as well as the functions and operations required to deliver voice and data service. Intended Audience This course is for participants who are new to the wireless industry or desire a general level understanding of wireless communications. Participants are not required to be technically-oriented to benefit from this course. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Describe the evolution of wireless communication technology from 1G to 3G

• List network components and the function of each component at an overview level

• Identify network elements and their functions • Describe wireless service delivery call flows

Suggested Prerequisites

• Welcome to Wireless Networks (eLearning) Complementary Courses

• Welcome to UMTS 3G Networks (eLearning) • Exploring GSM (Instructor Led) • Exploring GPRS and EDGE (Instructor Led) • Exploring UMTS (WCDMA) (Instructor Led)

Knowledge Knuggets 1. Introduction 2. Overview of Wireless in Today’s

Landscape 2.1. Evolution path from 1G to 3G

2.1.1. 1st generation 2.1.2. 2nd generation 2.1.3. 2.5 generation (GPRS/EDGE) 2.1.4. Intro to 3rd generation

2.2. Identify major wireless players 3. Network Overview

3.1. Components of the wireless network 3.1.1. Mobile devices 3.1.2. RAN 3.1.3. Circuit-switched core network 3.1.4. PSTN 3.1.5. IP core network 3.1.6. External packet services,

transport, roaming, OSS 4. Network Elements

4.1. Radio Access Network (RAN) 4.1.1. The cellular concept 4.1.2. Electromagnetic spectrum 4.1.3. Cell sites 4.1.4. Base stations and base

station controllers 4.2. Circuit-switched core network

4.2.1. MSC/VLR 4.2.2. HLR/Authentication center

4.3. Signaling system 7 network 4.4. GSM short message service

network components 4.5. CDMA-based 2G voice network 4.6. GPRS IP core network

4.6.1. SGSN 4.6.2. GGSN

5. Wireless Service Delivery 5.1. Registration 5.2. Voice calls 5.3. Short message service 5.4. Data calls

6. Summary

Put It All Together Assess the knowledge of the participant based on the objectives of the course

Page 109: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

106 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v3.0

1xEV-DO Networks (Rev 0) eLearning | Average Duration: 3 hours | Course Number: EVDO106

CDMA2000 networks have been deployed in many parts of the world. While these networks provide a higher voice capacity and support for packet data networks, they do not meet the IMT-2000 requirements for 2 Mbps data rates. 1xEV-DO Rev 0 represents the next step in the evolution of CDMA2000 systems, supporting data rates in excess of 2 Mbps and non-real-time packet data services. This course introduces 1xEV-DO technology. Specifically, air interface aspects are explained to show how 1xEV-DO Rev 0 can achieve a 2 Mbps bandwidth. In addition, the 1xEV-DO network architecture is covered. Since 1xEV-DO is deployed as an overlay to CDMA2000 networks, most service providers will want to know how 1xEV-DO systems will interoperate with CDMA2000 networks. This course addresses those questions, and concludes with a discussion of air interface protocols, channel structure and network interfaces. Intended Audience This course is intended for those seeking a detailed understanding of the evolution of the CDMA2000 network to 1xEV-DO Rev 0. This includes those in a design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering, network engineering, or verification role. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Discuss the relationship between 1xEV-DO and CDMA2000 • Define important features of 1xEV-DO such as air interface, peak

data rates and average data rates • Discuss how 1xEV-DO Rev 0 is able to achieve higher data rates • Explain the 1xEV-DO Rev 0 air interface details including the

protocol layering • Highlight the forward and reverse link features in 1xEV-DO Rev 0 • List requirements for handsets and networks to achieve

interoperability with CDMA2000 • Describe interoperability configurations • Examine how user originated session

Knowledge Knuggets 1. 1xEV-DO Introduction

1.1. Introduction to 1xEV-DO 1.2. Motivation for 1xEV-DO 1.3. 1xEV-DO standards 1.4. 1xEV-DO data rates in forward and

reverse directions 1.5. How are higher data rates achieved

in 1xEV-DV? 2. 1xEV-DO Architecture

2.1. Overview of the 1xEV-DO architecture 2.2. New 1xEV-DO components and

interfaces 3. 1xEV-DO Air Interface

3.1. 1xEV-DO air interface functions and capabilities

3.2. Rational for data rate increases in 1xEV-DO

4. 1xEV-DO Forward Link Details 4.1. 1xEV-DO forward link channel

structure 4.2. Important forward link features

5. 1xEV-DO Reverse Link Details 5.1. 1xEV-DO reverse link channel

structure 5.2. Important reverse link features

6. Interoperability with CDMA2000 6.1. Handset requirements for

CDMA2000 interoperability 6.2. Network requirements for

CDMA2000 interoperability

7. Call Flows

7.1. Mobile data session origination using simple IP

8. Summary

Put It All Together Assess the knowledge of the participant based on the objectives of the course

Page 110: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

107© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v2.0

1xEV-DO Networks (Rev A) eLearning | Average Duration: 3 hours | Course Number: EVDO107

Wireless service providers in many parts of the world are deploying networks based on 1xEV-DO (Rev 0) to support high speed packet data services. On the forward link, Rev 0 provides speeds rivaling DSL or cable modem Internet access. In the reverse direction, however, the speeds are much slower, comparable to CDMA2000 1x. Rev A of 1xEV-DO significantly enhances the reverse link to support data rates over ten times faster than Rev 0. In addition to improving the reverse link data rates, Rev A seeks to better support real-time services like Voice over IP (VoIP) and streaming video. With Award’s celebrated approach to crystallizing difficult concepts, this course clearly explains key differences between Rev 0 and Rev A for those already familiar with Rev 0. Intended Audience This course is intended for those with knowledge of 1xEV-DO Rev 0 who are seeking an understanding of the Rev A changes and enhancements. This includes those in design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering, network engineering, RF deployment engineering, field engineering and operations roles. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Describe the limitations and issues in 1xEV-DO (Rev 0) • Define important features of 1xEV-DO (Rev A) including peak data

rates, new channels and multi-user packets • Discuss the changes to Data Rate Control (DRC) processing at the

mobile and the base station • Describe how Rev A supports real time services with enhancements

such as small packet size support and multi-user packets • Analyze the performance enhancement changes in Rev A such as

DRC Offset and Data Source Control (DSC) • Describe the reverse link load management approach using Traffic-

to-Pilot (T2P) power ratios • Illustrate the reverse link data rate enhancements to support 1.85

Mbps • Explain enhancements to interoperability between 1x & 1xEV-DO

networks • Walk though an end-to-end call flow

Suggested Prerequisites

• 1xEV-DO Networks (Rev 0) (eLearning)

Knowledge Knuggets 1. 1xEV-DO (Rev 0) Review

1.1. Architecture 1.2. Forward link operations 1.3. Reverse link operations

2. Rev A Changes and Enhancements 2.1. Motivation 2.2. Rev A – new features 2.3. Rev A forward and reverse link

channels 3. Rev A Forward Link Operations

3.1. Rev 0 limitations 3.2. Data Rate Control (DRC) changes 3.3. Multi-user packet support 3.4. Additional MAC index values 3.5. DRC and Multi-user packets 3.6. Performance functions: DRC lock,

DRC offset and data source control 4. Rev A Reverse Link Details

4.1. Rev 0 limitations 4.2. Reverse link subtypes 4.3. Data rate selection 4.4. Auxiliary pilot usage 4.5. Hybrid ARQ on reverse link

5. Interoperability 5.1. Circuit notification for 1x

interoperability 6. End-to-End Call Flow

6.1. Example end-to-end call flow

7. Summary

Put It All Together Assess the knowledge of the participant based on the objectives of the course

Page 111: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

108 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v4.0

Overview of 3G Wireless Networks eLearning | Average Duration: 1.5 hours | Course Number: FUND105

3G is a set of requirements that describe a generation of wireless technologies. They are based on bandwidth, architecture and Quality of Service. Since this is a set of requirements, there is not a single standard for 3G. This course provides a description of the 3G requirements as well as an overview of each of the 3rd Generation wireless technologies. We start with a review of 2G networks (GSM and IS-95) and explore the limitations of those networks and the motivations for enhancing the network to support 3G requirements. The course continues with the 1x/ 1xEV-D network including the network architecture, key components, and data rates. Before moving to UMTS networks, the course covers the 2.5G system GPRS/EDGE as this was an important step in the evolution of GSM networks. The course includes overview of the UMTS network architecture, data rates and ability for UMTS to deliver packet data. Intended Audience This course is intended for anyone seeking an understanding of 3G wireless networks, their features and capabilities. Learning Objectives

• Describe the evolution of 2G voice networks in order to provide high speed, cost-effective access to the Internet and corporate intranets

• State the limitations of 2G networks and motivations behind 3G • List the major 2.5G and 3G technologies of 1x/ 1xEV-DO,

GPRS/EDGE and UMTS • Sketch the 2G and 3G network architectures • Identify the possible evolution paths from 2G to 3G solutions • Compare and contrast the 2G, 2.5G and 3G networks

Knowledge Knuggets 1. Evolution of Wireless

1.1. Key services found in 1G, 2G and 3G 1.2. Capabilities and limitations

2. 2G Wireless Networks 2.1. Architectural overview of 2G

networks 2.2. Overview of data services 2.3. Limitations of 2G systems

3. Evolution to 3G 3.1. Driving forces behind 3G 3.2. 3G network architecture 3.3. CDMA2000 evolution 3.4. UMTS evolution

4. 1x/1xEV-DO Network Architecture 4.1. Comparison of 2G to 3G 4.2. Components used in voice calls 4.3. Connection path for data sessions

5. Introduction to 1xEV-DO Release 0 5.1. Goals and requirements 5.2. Ability to provide Internet services 5.3. Data rates 5.4. Comparison of 1x and 1xEV-DO

6. GPRS/EDGE Network Architecture 6.1. Overview of the architecture of

GPRS/EDGE 6.2. GPRS traffic delivery 6.3. Mobility in GPRS

7. UMTS Network Architecture

7.1. Overview of the architecture of UMTS

7.2. Delivery of traffic in UMTS 7.3. Influence of GSM/GPRS on the

UMTS architecture 8. Summary Put It All Together Assess the knowledge of the participant based on the objectives of the course

Page 112: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

109© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v3.0

Overview of WiMAX eLearning | Average Duration: 3 Hours | Course Number: WMAX102

WiMAX is one of the choices for next generation broadband wireless networks. Its high data rates enable advanced multimedia applications. Also, it offers a wireless alternative to popular DSL and cable modem access services. This eLearning course offers a quick and concise overview of WiMAX networks and the 802.16e based air interface. WiMAX protocols, air interface and mobility aspects are covered to provide an end-to-end view of the network. The discussion of QoS, security and services enables the student to understand the potential of WiMAX networks. End-to-end connection setup and bandwidth allocation scenarios provide a glimpse into the operation of WiMAX networks. By the conclusion of this course, the student will understand what WiMAX offers, its network architecture, how it works, and potential applications and services. Intended Audience This course is an end-to-end overview of WiMAX networks, so it is targeted for a broad audience. This includes those in design, test, sales, marketing, system engineering and deployment groups. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Describe the state of wireless networks and trends for next generation wireless networks

• Sketch the WiMAX network architecture and its interfaces • Describe OFDM concept and how it is used in 802.16e • Define the key features of the 802.16e air interface for WiMAX • List the steps followed to establish a WiMAX connection • Explain how mobility is enabled in WiMAX networks • List the wide range of applications supported by WiMAX networks • Describe the levels of QoS defined in WiMAX to support different

applications • Identify the security issues in WiMAX and describe how they are

addressed • Explain deployment scenarios of WiMAX networks

Knowledge Knuggets 1. Setting the Stage

1.1. Wireless networks: 3G, WiFi and BWA

1.2. Trends for next generation wireless networks

1.3. Standard organizations 1.4. Drivers for WiMAX

2. WiMAX Networks 2.1. WiMAX network architecture 2.2. WiMAX network interfaces 2.3. Key features of WiMAX 2.4. Releases of 802.16 air interface

3. WiMAX (802.16e) Air Interface 3.1. OFDM/OFDMA and SOFDMA

concepts 3.2. Protocol stack 3.3. Data rates and coverage 3.4. Mobility profiles

4. WiMAX QoS and Security 4.1. Applications 4.2. Deployment scenarios 4.3. QoS classes 4.4. PKMv2 security

5. End-to-End Connection Setup 5.1. Network entry 5.2. Walk through of connection setup

6. WiMAX Mobility 6.1. Radio mobility 6.2. Network mobility

7. Deployment Scenarios

7.1. Deployment choices 7.2. Spectrum issues

8. Summary

Put It All Together Assess the knowledge of the participant based on the objectives of the course

Page 113: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

110 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

Exploring Wireless Landscape, IP Convergence, and 4G Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days

A good understanding of wireless networks and IP-wireless convergence are essential building blocks for new entrants to the communication industry. This course provides very good conceptual understanding of architecture, leading technologies and operations of 2G/3G/4G wireless and converged IP networks. The course demystifies the terminology and acronymns commonly used in the wireless industry and helps us understand the dependencies and interactions with other parts of the network. The course begins with a “Big Picture” of communications network. It then focuses on wireless technologies such as GSM/GPRS/UMTS/HSPA+, 1x/1xEV-DO, LTE and explains their operations and supported services. Participants will learn life of a mobile in a typical wireless network and the roles of various wireless network components and operations of services like SMS, MMS, Web browsing, VPN, email and others. Intended Audience The course is for participants with little or no wireless knowledge. The diverse nature of this course makes it suitable for beginners in various organizations, including those in project management, sales, marketing, finance, system design, system test, systems and network engineering, product planning, management, support and operations. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Sketch the wireless technology landscape from 1G to 4G • Sketch the IP Convergence architecture • Sketch the wireless network architecture • Describe key features and benefits of CDMA (1x) and 1xEV-DO (Rev

0 and Rev A) • Describe key features and benefits of GSM/GPRS/UMTS/HSPA • Explain how mobility works in Wireless networks • Sketch the technology path for leading carriers in the world • Explain the wireless network operations, including registration, call

setup, call delivery and handovers • Understand the Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) valuable to

wireless service providers • Sketch the VoIP and IMS architectures • Show an end-to-end VoIP/IMS call scenario • Identify the need and driving forces for 3.5G and 4G • Discuss key building blocks of 4G technologies • List the key characteristics of HSPA+, LTE and WiMAX • Differentiate between CDMA, GSM, WCDMA and OFDMA • Explain the various Fixed Mobile Convergence (FMC) options

Course Outline 1. Prologue: Wireless and IPC Landscape

1.1. Shift in business from 1G to 4G 1.2. Shift in Technology from 1G to 4G

1.2.1. Which carrier is doing what? 1.2.2. Which vendor is doing what?

1.3. Network of networks 1.4. IP convergence and FMC

1.4.1. Motivation 1.4.2. Carrier and enterprise

2. GSM/GPRS/EDGE/UMTS/HSPA 2.1. Network architecture 2.2. Technology overview 2.3. Capabilities, benefits and challenges 2.4. Identities in GSM/GPRS and UMTS 2.5. SIM card and its benefits 2.6. Life of a mobile: Operations

2.6.1. Registration/location update 2.6.2. Call Setup, Paging, Mobility

3. CDMA - 1x and 1xEV-DO Rev 0/Rev A 3.1. Technology concepts 3.2. 1x and 1xEV-DO network architecture 3.3. Capabilities, benefits and challenges 3.4. Life of a mobile in 1x and 1xEV-DO 3.5. Mobile IP and roaming

4. Services in 3G networks 4.1. Regulatory – E911, CALEA, etc. 4.2. SMS/EMS/MMS, etc.

4.3. PTT 4.4. Enterprise Services - VPN, email

5. WiFi Essentials 5.1. Evolution for 820.11 family 5.2. Capabilities, benefits and

challenges 6. VoIP and IMS

6.1. The service network competitors 6.1.1. IMS/MMD 6.1.2. P2P (Skype, MS LCS, etc.)

6.2. Supporting technologies/ protocols 6.2.1. SIP/H.323/Megaco/

H.248 6.3. End-to-end call/session setup

7. LTE and 4G Networks 7.1. LTE Network architecture 7.2. LTE Technology overview 7.3. Identities in LTE 7.4. Life of a UE: Operations

7.4.1. Registration/location update

7.4.2. Call Setup, Paging, Mobility

7.5. WiMAX 7.6. HSPA+ 7.7. MIMO – What and why? 7.8. Deployment timelines and

challenges

Page 114: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

111© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.3

Exploring Wireless Technologies and Networks Instructor Led | Duration: 5 Days | Course Number: FUND203

A good understanding of wireless networks and IP convergence concepts is an essential building block for those in the wireless communication industry. This course provides a very good conceptual understanding of the architecture, leading technologies and operations of 2G/3G/4G wireless and converged IP networks. The course demystifies the terminology and acronyms commonly used in the wireless industry and helps new hires understand the dependencies and interactions with other parts of the network. The course begins with a “Big Picture” of communications networks and then focuses on 2G/3G wireless technologies, services and operations. Participants will learn functions of components like HLR, MSC/VLR, BSC/RNC, BTS/Node B, PDSN/FA, Home Agent, AAA, BSSM/OMC and operations of services like SMS, MMS, CAMEL/WIN, VPN, email and others. Intended Audience The course is for participants with little or no wireless knowledge. The diverse nature of this course makes it suitable for beginners in various organizations, including those in procurement, IT, project management, sales, marketing, finance, system design, system test, systems and network engineering, product planning, management, support and operations. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• List and classify various wireless technologies • Sketch the wireless technology landscape from 1G to 4G • Sketch the wireless network and IP convergence architecture • Describe key features, benefits and evolution path for: ­ CDMA (1x) and 1xEV-DO (Rev 0 & Rev A) ­ GSM/GPRS/EDGE UMTS/HSPA ­ HSPA+, LTE and WiMAX ­ Wi-Fi and Bluetooth

• Differentiate between CDMA, GSM, WCDMA and OFDMA • Compare mobility protocols – GSM-MAP, GTP, and Mobile IP • Sketch the technology path for leading carriers in the world • Explain the wireless network operations including registration/

location update, network acquisition, voice and data call setup, handovers and roaming

• Sketch the VoIP and IMS architecture • Show end-to-end email, VPN and other data call scenarios • Explain indoor and seamless solutions GAN/UMA and Femto • Identify the need and driving forces for 3.5G and 4G • Explain key building blocks of 4G technologies • List and classify different mobile broadcast technologies

Suggested Prerequisites

• A general understanding of telecommunications and Internet Protocol (IP) is recommended but not essential

Course Outline 1. Wireless and IP Convergence

Landscape 1.1. Wireless technologies 1.2. IP convergence

2. Radio Network Basics 2.1. Modulation 2.2. Propagation issues 2.3. FDMA

3. GSM-EGPRS Networks-Architecture and Key Services 3.1. GSM Architecture and key services 3.2. The SIM card 3.3. Mobility 3.4. Call setup 3.5. GPRS and EDGE architecture and

data communication 4. GSM, GPRS and EDGE Technology and

Features 4.1. Air interface fundamentals 4.2. Frequency hopping and power

control 4.3. Modulation and coding 4.4. Idle mode 4.5. Paging/DRX 4.6. Access 4.7. Voice and DTX 4.8. Handover

5. UMTS – R99 5.1. WCDMA 5.2. Channelization and scrambling codes

5.3. Power control 5.4. Mobility and handover 5.5. UTRAN

6. 3.HSPA and IMS 6.1. HSDPA 6.2. HSUPA 6.3. UMTS IMS architecture

7. CDMA2000 1x 7.1. 1x voice call setup 7.2. 1x data call setup 7.3. 1x mobility and power control

8. 1xEV-DO 8.1. System architecture 8.2. FL/RL 8.3. Data call setup 8.4. Mobility

9. 3.5G and 4G Technologies and Networks 9.1. LTE, WiMAX, seamless mobility

10. Wi-Fi and Bluetooth Essentials 10.1. UMA, bluetooth, zigbee

11. Voice and Data Services in 3G Networks

11.1. Consumer voice and data services

11.2. WIN/CAMEL 11.3. WAP 11.4. Enterprise solutions 11.5. Email solutions 11.6. Streaming media 11.7. Push-to-talk

Page 115: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

112 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.1

Fundamentals of RF Engineering Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: FUND204

A strong understanding of RF engineering fundamentals is required to optimize the performance of cellular networks. This course presents the fundamentals of RF engineering for new engineers who need to be grounded in the fundamentals and existing engineers who need to fill in any gaps they may have in their understanding. This course illustrates the network architecture and highlights the importance of several aspects of RF engineering. The RF propagation mechanisms that affect the RF signal path from the transmitter to the receiver are discussed. Coverage is discussed using the link budget examples for 2G and 3G systems. Traffic engineering is described from the perspective of Erlang-B and backhaul provisioning. Deployments of GSM and CDMA/WCDMA/EV-DO networks are considered. Finally, tools useful for network planning/design, deployment, and optimization are reviewed. Intended Audience This fundamentals course is intended for new or experienced RF engineers who need familiarity with the fundamentals of RF engineering. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Sketch the network architecture for 2G, 2.5G, and 3G • Outline KPIs that quantify RF performance • Discuss the roles of various RF components • Describe RF propagation mechanisms • Explain various components of the link budget • Summarize how Erlang-B can be used for capacity provisioning • Discuss the influence of vocoders and high-speed data on traffic

engineering • Contrast TDMA deployment with CDMA deployment • Describe issues with equipment sharing between 2G/2.5G and 3G • Explain how tools can be used during various stages of the cellular

network (e.g., design, deployment, and optimization)

Course Outline 1. Overview of GSM/GPRS/UMTS

1.1. GSM, GPRS, UMTS architecture 1.2. Evolution from GSM/GPRS to UMTS

2. Introduction to Cellular RF Engineering 2.1. Stages of technology deployment 2.2. Planning, design, engineering,

optimization 2.3. Radio and core, backhaul, network

economics- CapEx/OpEx, KPIs 2.4. Importance of RF engineering

3. Review of RF Components 3.1. Baseband and RF processing 3.2. Antennas (basic principles, omni and

sectorized) 3.3. Feeders, jumpers, duplexer and

diplexer 3.4. HPA, LNA, TMA, repeaters

4. RF Propagation Fundamentals 4.1. RF Terms (RSSI, SIR, dB, dBm) 4.2. Distance-based path loss, long-term

fading, and short-term fading 4.3. Propagation models (e.g., Hata-

Okumara and COST-231) 4.4. Spectrum for network deployment

5. WCDMA and HSPA Fundamentals 5.1. UTRAN architecture 5.2. PHY layer functions 5.3. Handover 5.4. HSPA

6. Coverage and Link Budget Fundamentals 6.1. Significance of link budget 6.2. 2G/ 2.5G and 3G link budget

(components of the link budget with numerical examples)

6.3. Influence of carrier frequency 6.4. Challenges of an overlay network

7. Capacity and Traffic Engineering 7.1. Voice calls and Erlang-B model

(trunking and GoS) 7.2. Influence of AMR and high-speed

data 7.3. Backhaul provisioning 7.4. RF technology factors impacting

capacity 8. Deployment Considerations

8.1. GSM vs. WCDMA 8.2. 2G/2.5G and 3G-specific

features for enhanced RF performance (e.g., handover and power control)

8.3. Cell-site planning/sharing 9. Tools for Deployment and

Optimization 9.1. Network planning/design tools 9.2. Troubleshooting/KPI monitoring

tools 9.3. Drive-testing and post-processing 9.4. RF optimization approaches

Page 116: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

113© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.4

Exploring GSM/EGPRS/UMTS/HSPA/HSPA+ Instructor Led | Duration: 5 Days | Course Number: FUND201

3GPP-based technologies have left their mark as the most dominant wireless systems deployed globally. The success of GSM technologies in turn has given rise to optimistic scenarios for the evolution of 3G and 4G technologies such as UMTS and LTE. This course is an in-depth look at the 3GPP family of standards, from GSM to HSPA+. We begin our journey by gaining an understanding about the underlying GSM technology, which was designed for easy roaming. We then cover the most important enhancement to 2G-GSM, specifically GPRS and EDGE, which facilitate efficient access to packet data networks. 3G UMTS brings not only higher data rates but also QoS, better security, multimedia and the possibility of fallback on 2G. The efficiency of UMTS is dramatically improved with the advent of HSPA, and we will take a detailed look at how this is achieved in current deployments. Intended Audience This course is intended for those seeking thorough conceptual knowledge of 3GPP from GSM to Release 7 of UMTS. The diverse nature of this course makes it suitable for beginners in various organizations, including those in procurement, IT, project management, sales, marketing, finance, system design, system test, systems and network engineering, product planning, management, support and operations. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Differentiate among different 3GPP wireless technologies and describe the driving forces behind each

• Sketch different networks and interfaces in 3GPP • Describe TDMA (GSM) and WCDMA radio technologies • Explain the motivation behind HSPA, HSPA+ and LTE • Compare and contrast different technologies • Explain details of air interface operations for each technology • Sketch the following call operations for each technology • Explain mobile and network operations including

registration/location update, network acquisition, voice and data call setup, handovers and roaming for each technology

• Describe interworking between different releases • Discuss how mobility is handled in each radio network • Sketch VoIP and IMS architecture and call scenarios • Show end-to-end email, VPN and other data call scenarios

Suggested Prerequisites

• A general understanding of wireless technologies is recommended but not essential

Course Outline 1. Introduction to 3PP Technologies 2. GSM to EDGE

2.1. GSM 2.2. GPRS 2.3. EDGE

3. GSM Network Architecture 3.1. GSM BSS architecture 3.2. GSM NSS architecture

4. GSM Mobility and Call Processing 4.1. IMSI attach and detach 4.2. Location update 4.3. Handover 4.4. Security in GSM

5. Introduction to UMTS 6. UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access

Network (UTRAN) 6.1. UTRAN functions 6.2. UTRAN components 6.3. UTRAN interfaces

7. UTRAN Channels and Protocols 7.1. WCDMA terms and concepts 7.2. Channelization and scrambling codes 7.3. Power control 7.4. Handover and reselection 7.5. Channel types and channel structure 7.6. RRC and the radio access bearer

8. Bearer Independent Circuit Switched Core Network

9. Packet Switched Core Network

Architecture 9.1. Packet-switched protocols 9.2. Service activation 9.3. Access point names

10. Inter-System Procedures 10.1. Cell reselection: UMTS to GSM 10.2. Circuit-switched Inter-RAT

handovers 10.3. Packet-switched Inter-RAT

handovers 11. UMTS IMS Architecture

11.1. End-to-end VoIP call setup 12. HSDPA and HSUPA

12.1. HSDPA 12.2. HSUPA

13. Key Concepts of HSPA+ 13.1. R5/R6 HSPA review 13.2. HSPA+ key features 13.3. R6 latency issues 13.4. HSPA+ flat architecture

14. HSPA+ Deployment and Interworking

14.1. Interworking with 3GPP 14.2. Interworking with other systems

15. Quality of Service 16. Wireless Data Applications 17. 4G - LTE

Page 117: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

114 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.6

GSM Performance Workshop Instructor Led | Duration: 3 Days | Course Number: GPRS401

As wireless service providers continue their deployment of GSM networks, one of the key concerns is how to manage and monitor the performance of these networks. This unique workshop prepares students to use the tools at their disposal to manage the performance of their GSM network. Modern GSM network equipment offers a wide array of performance features such as RF Frequency Hopping and the Adaptive Multi-Rate (AMR) speech codec. When properly tuned, these features provide very high quality voice services and high spectral efficiency in GSM networks. To achieve optimal performance, network operators must know how to collect the right set of performance measurements, interpret those measurements, and adjust network parameters when improvements are needed. Concepts are reinforced through hands-on exercises that show the impact of these parameter changes. Intended Audience This course is intended for a technical audience, primarily those in RF engineering, RF performance, system performance, RF design or planning organizations. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Describe the basic GSM operations and the configurable parameters that control them

• Discuss the effects of the major GSM performance enhancing features and understand when each feature should be used

• Select the key GSM network performance counters to monitor and understand how to interpret them

• Show how GSM control channels and traffic channels should be dimensioned to ensure service availability

• Describe how frequency hopping can be used with fractional loading to provide very high spectral efficiency

• Examine the AMR speech codec and see how it can be applied to dramatically increase network quality and capacity

• Explain the impact of supporting GSM at 850 MHz and 1900 MHz in the same cell

• Analyze the performance features, counters and parameters of your network equipment

Suggested Prerequisites

• Exploring GSM (Instructor Led) Complementary Courses

• GPRS and EDGE Performance Workshop (Instructor Led)

Course Outline 1. Optimizing GSM Networks

1.1. Rationale for performance analysis 1.2. Optimization process

2. Review of GSM Principles 2.1. Introduction to GSM 2.2. GSM network architecture 2.3. GSM channel structure

3. Cell Selection and Idle Mode 3.1. Cell selection 3.2. Idle mode and cell reselection 3.3. Paging procedures

4. Mobility Management and Call Setup 4.1. Requesting and channel 4.2. The SDCCH 4.3. The TCH

5. Dimensioning GSM Channels 6. GSM Frequency Planning

6.1. BCCH layer planning 6.2. Frequency hopping layer planning 6.3. Overlay/underlay planning 6.4. Automatic frequency planning and

tools 7. Dedicated Mode Performance

7.1. Measurements 7.2. Power control 7.3. Handover 7.4. Discontinuous transmission

8. GSM Voice Fundamentals 9. Introduction to AMR

9.1. AMR primer 10. Improving Quality with AMR 11. Improving Capacity with AMR

Page 118: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

115© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.3

1x and 1xEV-DO Fundamentals Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: EVDO201

CDMA2000 (also known as 1x) has been widely deployed, providing both voice and packet data services in a mobile environment. Many operators have also added 1x Evolution for Data Optimized (1xEV-DO) to their networks, to efficiently support higher data rates of up to 3 Mbps. This course provides an overview of the key concepts, architectures and operations that enable these wireless technologies, explaining how high quality voice and high speed data are delivered. The course begins by reviewing the fundamental concepts of Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA), and then moves into a discussion of how CDMA technology is used to implement the channels in a CDMA2000 network. The course then looks at 1xEV-DO, highlighting the key similarities and differences with CDMA2000, and demonstrating how data rates can be increased by an order of magnitude or more. Intended Audience This is a detailed technical course, primarily intended for a technical audience, including those in system design, system integration and test, systems engineering, network engineering, operations, and support. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Sketch the 1x and 1xEV-DO network architectures • Explain the basic principles of CDMA technology • Illustrate the steps involved in setting up voice and data calls in a 1x

network • Describe the process of soft handoff and power control in 1x • Discuss the concepts of 1xEV-DO sessions and connections • Understand the operation of the 1xEV-DO forward and reverse links • Walk through 1xEV-DO sector switching and Mobile IP

Course Outline 1. CDMA2000 Network Architecture

1.1. Standards 1.2. Circuit core network 1.3. Packet core network

2. CDMA2000 Technology 2.1. Code Division Multiple Access 2.2. Orthogonal codes 2.3. PN codes

3. CDMA2000 Channels 3.1. Overhead channels 3.2. Traffic channels 3.3. Radio configurations

4. CDMA2000 Voice Call Setup 4.1. System access and registration 4.2. Originating and terminating calls

5. CDMA2000 Data Call Setup 5.1. Packet Data Serving Node 5.2. IP mobility

6. CDMA2000 Mobility 6.1. Hard, soft and softer handoff 6.2. Active set management

7. CDMA2000 Power Control 7.1. Open loop power control 7.2. Closed loop power control

8. 1xEV-DO Network Architecture 8.1. 1xEV-DO network architecture 8.2. Air and network interfaces

9. 1xEV-DO Session Establishment

9.1. Session establishment 9.2. Subnets and address

management 9.3. Packet network interworking

10. 1xEV-DO Connections 10.1. Active set management 10.2. Active and dormant states

11. 1xEV-DO Forward Link 11.1. Forward link channels 11.2. Data rate control 11.3. Transmission formats 11.4. Hybrid ARQ

12. 1xEV-DO Reverse Link 12.1. Reverse link channels 12.2. Transition probabilities 12.3. Traffic-to-Pilot (T2P)

13. 1xEV-DO Mobility 13.1. Sector switching 13.2. Data source control 13.3. Mobile IP

Page 119: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

116 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 © 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727 v1.0

Wireless and 3G/4G Basics Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day

Wireless systems have come a long way from early systems based on analog technogies to current 3G/4G wireless technologies that use various digital technologies. This course provides an introduction to wireless networks, including an overview of the key components of the wireless network architecture (i.e., MSC, VLR, HLR, and BTS) and an overview of various 3rd generation wireless systems such as CDMA2000 and UMTS and 4G systems like LTE. This course compares and contrasts the various wireless techniques and standards such as CDMA and GSM. In this course, you will learn the steps required to set up and maintain a voice call, paging operation in cellular networks, roaming scenarios and handovers/handoffs. It also includes a path to 3G/4G networks, and discusses the characteristics of 3G/4G systems, including methods to achieve higher data rates and offer multimedia services in a mobile wireless environment. Intended Audience The course is for participants with little or no wireless knowledge. The diverse nature of this course makes it suitable for beginners in various disciplines of the wireless industry, including those in project management, sales, marketing, finance, system design, system test, systems and network engineering, product support and operations. Learning Objectives After completing this course, the student will be able to:

• Sketch the wireless network architecture and components for • CDMA2000, GPRS/EDGE and UMTS • Enumerate the network operations including registration, call setup,

call delivery and handovers • List the challenges of radio communication • Explain the key differences between CDMA and GSM (TDMA) • Determine the driving forces behind 3G/4G networks • Outline the evolutionary path from 2G to 3G/4G networks • Define the basic 3G/4G characteristics • Illustrate the services possible with 3G/4G • Describe CDMA2000, UMTS and GPRS/EDGE • Describe LTE

Complementary Courses

• UMTS Essentials (R99 to R7) (Instructor led)

Course Outline

1. Introduction to Wireless Networks 1.1. Cellular technology evolution 1.2. The wireless big picture

2. Wireless Network Operations 2.1. Life of a mobile station 2.2. 2G cellular network architecture 2.3. 3G cellular network architecture 2.4. 4G cellular network architecture 2.5. Call processing operations 2.6. Roaming 2.7. Handovers

3. Radio Basics 3.1. Spectrum and signals 3.2. Cell sites 3.3. Access technologies 3.4. Generic radio functionality

4. GSM 4.1. GSM defined 4.2. The SIM 4.3. GSM radio network 4.4. GSM core network

5. GPRS and EDGE 5.1. GPRS defined 5.2. GPRS architecture 5.3. EDGE defined 5.4. 2.5G/3G data rates

6. UMTS and HSPA 6.1. UMTS/WCDMA 6.2. UMTS packet data operations

6.3. HSDPA 6.4. HSUPA

7. HSPA+ 7.1. HSPA+ defined 7.2. HSPA+ key features and

associated benefits 8. 1x and EV-DO Networks

8.1. 1xEV-DO 9. LTE

9.1. LTE defined 9.2. LTE RAN architecture 9.3. EPC architecture 9.4. LTE packet data operations 9.5. Services

Page 120: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

117© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.972.664.0727

Course Index

11x and 1xEV-DO Fundamentals ............................1151xEV-DO Networks (Rev 0) (e) ...............................1061xEV-DO Networks (Rev A) (e) ...............................107

33GPP Packet Core Networks (R99 to R8) ...............96

CCloud Computing Essentials for Business ................ 9Compare and Contrast Cellular Technologies .......... 7

EEnterprise IP Network Connectivity ........................... 6Ethernet Backhaul Essentials .................................66Ethernet Backhaul Overview (e) ..............................55Ethernet Backhaul Planning .................................... 74Ethernet Basics (e) ...................................................60Ethernet Bridging (e) ................................................62Ethernet VLANs (e) ...................................................61Exploring Cloud Computing Service Models........... 76Exploring GSM/EGPRS/UMTS/HSPA/HSPA+ .......113Exploring HSPA+ (R7, R8 & R9) ..............................89Exploring IMS (R8) ...................................................69Exploring IPv6 ...........................................................67Exploring IPv6 for LTE Networks ..............................29Exploring Ethernet Backhaul ................................... 71Exploring Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS) ...........77Exploring IP Routing and Ethernet Bridging ...........73Exploring MPLS ........................................................68Exploring SIP, VoIP and IP Convergence with IMS ..70Exploring the Service Oriented Architecture (SOA) ..78Exploring UMTS (WCDMA) .......................................88Exploring Wireless Landscape, IP Convergence, and 4G ..110Exploring Wireless Technologies and Networks ...111

FFundamentals of RF Engineering ..........................112

GGSM Performance Workshop ................................114

HHSDPA (R5) (e) .........................................................85HSPA+ Overview (R7) (e) .........................................87HSPA+ Protocols and Signaling (R7, R8 & R9) ......94

H (continued) HSUPA (R6) (e) .........................................................86

IIMS in UMTS (R8) Networks ....................................95Interconnecting IP Networks (e) ..............................63IP Basics (e) ..............................................................56IP Convergence Essentials ......................................65IP Convergence for Sales and Marketing ...............12IP Convergence Overview (e) ...................................49IP Quality of Service (QoS) (e) .................................53IP Routing (e) ............................................................57

LLTE Air Interface Signaling Overview (e) .................23LTE and GSM/UMTS Interworking ...........................34LTE Essentials...........................................................27LTE Overview (e) .......................................................21LTE Protocols and Signaling ....................................32LTERANSignalingandOperationsCertification .....38LTERFPlanningandDesignCertificationWorkshop ... 37LTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Overview (e) ..22LTE Services for Enterprise Customers ...................13LTE-Advanced Technical Overview ..........................36LTE-EPCCapacityPlanningCertificationWorkshop ..39LTE-EPC Networks and Signaling ...........................35LTERANCapacityPlanningCertificationWorkshop .. 40

MMastering HSPA Protocols and Signaling ...............93LTE Technology Overview .........................................28Mastering LTE Air Interface ..................................... 31Mastering TD-LTE Air Interface ................................33Mastering UMTS Core Networks (R99 to R7) .........91Mastering UMTS Radio Protocols and Signaling ....92Multiple Antenna Techniques (e) ............................43Multi-Carrier HSPA+ (R8 & R9) ................................90

OOverview of 3G Wireless Networks (e) ..................108Overview of IMS (e) .................................................. 51Overview of IPv6 for LTE Networks (e) ....................25Overview of MPLS (e) ...............................................50Overview of OFDM (e) ..............................................42Overview of UMTS (e) ...............................................81Overview of WiMAX (e) ...........................................109

QQoS in IP Networks (e) .............................................58

SSession Initiation Protocol (SIP) (e) .........................54SIP and Diameter for IMS/VoLTE ............................75

TTCP and Transport Layer Protocols (e) ....................59Technology Trends for Business ..............................14The M2M Ecosystem................................................10The Mobile Enterprise ..............................................16The Road to LTE ........................................................26The World of App Development ...............................15The World of Enterprise ............................................. 8Topics of Interest ...................................................... 17

UUMTS Mobility (e) .....................................................84UMTS (WCDMA) RF Optimization Mentoring ..99-100UMTS Signaling (e) ...................................................83UMTS/HSPA (WCDMA) RF Design Mentoring .........98UMTS/HSPA+ RF Optimization Workshop ............101UMTS/HSPA/HSPA+ Air Interface ........................... 97UMTS/WCDMA Air Interface Fundamentals (e) .....82UnifiedCommunications(UC)andIMSfortheEnterprise..11

VVoLTE and IMS in LTE-EPC Networks ......................30Voice and Video over IP (VoIP) Overview (e) ...........52Voice and Video over IP Protocols and Technologies .. 72VoLTE Overview ........................................................24

WWelcome to GSM/GPRS (e) ...................................105Welcome to IP Networking (e) .................................48Welcome to IPv6 (e) .................................................64Welcome to LTE (e) ...................................................20Welcome to UMTS (e)...............................................80Welcome to Wireless Networks (e) .......................104Wi-Fi Overview (e) .....................................................44Wi-Fi Technical Overview .........................................45Wireless and 3G/4G Basics ..................................116

*

*

*

*

**

*

*

* New Course(e) eLearning Course

**

*

*

*

*

Page 121: Award Catalog 2013 1st Ed

2013 C

ATA

LOG

TEC

HN

OLO

GY TR

AININ

G •

1st E

DITIO

N

© 2013 Award Solutions, Inc., Edition 1.0

All rights reserved. No part of this catalog shall be reproduced or transmitted by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the express written consent from Award Solutions, Inc.

AmericasRichardson, TX USAPhone: +1.972.664.0727Email: [email protected]

Europe, Middle East & AfricaDublin, IrelandPhone: +353 87 6431747Email: [email protected]

Asia & PacificBangalore, IndiaPhone: +91 80 23169107Email: [email protected]

Please visit our website at www.awardsolutions.com.

4G HSPA+ LTE EPC LTE-ADVANCED TD-LTE VoLTE CLOUD COMPUTING M2M UCC IP CONVERGENCE IPv6 MPLS IMS

Visit our sister site at www.LTEuniversity.com, an online resource to stay up to speed on LTE.